SRAL XD 3.7 Training Manual

Training Manual
SRAL XD (plug-in IDU) SVR 3.7

Low Capacity Digital Radio - 7...38 GHz
Training documentation
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
s
Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006
V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10
I-20126 Milano
Issued by Customer Documentation Department
S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158
I-20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI
DISCLAIMER
Siemens may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights relevant to the subject matters
present in this document.
If not explicitly defined by a license agreement written by Siemens, the ownership of this document does not give any use license for the above
mentioned patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual properties.
For your convenience, Siemens may make this document available.
The entire risk deriving from the use, or the results of the use, of this document are at users charge.
The information contained in this document is subjected to changes without notice.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed previously in a written contract.
Siemens gives no assurance relevant to the accuracy of the results or of the output deriving from such information.
In case of utilization of the information transferred by means of this document, we advise You to verify if the export licenses, required by the
laws, have been granted or if there are not any other impediments arising from the laws in course in Italy, Germany or relevant to the export.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006

Safety Rules
1
Glossary
2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3
PHYSICAL INTERFACES
4
CONFIGURATIONS
5
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6
PROTECTION SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
7
SERVICE CHANNELS MANAGEMENT AND
PROTECTION
8
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
9
ACTIVATION
10
LOOP BACK
11
MAINTENANCE
12
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
13
14
15
SRAL XD (plug-in IDU)
SVR 3.7
Low Capacity Digital Radio -
7...38 GHz
Training Manual
index
SRAL XD (plug-in IDU) Siemens
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
V
Status of Manual
1 Chp. 1 Safety Rules Issue 1, June 2006
2 Chp. 2 Glossary Issue 1, June 2006
3 Chp. 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Issue 1, June 2006
4 Chp. 4 PHYSICAL INTERFACES Issue 1, June 2006
5 Chp. 5 CONFIGURATIONS Issue 1, June 2006
6 Chp. 6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Issue 1, June 2006
7 Chp. 7 PROTECTION SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE Issue 1, June 2006
8 Chp. 8 SERVICE CHANNELS MANAGEMENT AND
PROTECTION
Issue 1, June 2006
9 Chp. 9 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS Issue 1, June 2006
10 Chp. 10 ACTIVATION Issue 1, June 2006
11 Chp. 11 LOOP BACK Issue 1, June 2006
12 Chp. 12 MAINTENANCE Issue 1, June 2006
13 Chp. 13 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS Issue 1, June 2006
STATUS OF MANUAL
Current: Issue 1, June 2006
Previous:
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
VI
Warnhinweise
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslufig bestimmte Teile der Gerte unter Spannung. Einige Teile knnen
auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnhinweise kann zu Krperverletzung und Sachschden fhren.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert und wartet.
Beachten sie bitte die ntigen Sicherheitsanforderungen und leisten Sie durch ein problembewutes Verhalten
Ihren Beitrag zur Verhtung von Unfllen jeder Art. Gefahren fr Leib und Leben / Leben und Gesundheit bzw.
Verletzungen, die aus sicherheitswidrigem Verhalten resultieren knnen, sind von einer Haftung durch das
Training Institute ausgeschlossen.
Warning
High Voltages are present in certain parts of this equipment. Some parts can also have high operating
temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in equipment
damage.
Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
Please ensure the necessary safety requirements are met and, by demonstrating a responsible attitude, play your
part in avoiding accidents of any kind. Danger to life and limb, life and well being or injuries that could result from
actions adverse to safety are excluded from any liability on the part of the Training Institute.
Atencin
Algunos elementos de este equipo presentan tensiones altas. Incluso algunos componentes pueden presentar
alta temperatura.
No observar estas condiciones y las instrucciones de seguridad puede causar daos personales, as como daos
al equipo.
Por lo tanto el sistema debe ser instalado y mantenido por personal cualificado.
Tenga presente los requerimientos de seguridad y contribuya a la prevencin de accidentes de toda ndole,
actuando consciente de los problemas que pudieran surgir. El Training Institute' no se responsabiliza por daos
y perjuicios resultantes de actuaciones contrarias a los aspectos de seguridad y que pongan en peligro la salud
y la vida de las personas involucradas.
Attention
Des tensions leves sont invitablement prsentes des points spcifiques de cet quipement lectrique.
Certains lments peuvent aussi avoir en service des temprature leves.
La non-observation de ces conditions et des instructions de scurit peut engendrer des dgats personnelles ou
un endommagement du matriel.
Pour ces raisons seulement le personnel form et qualifi est permis dinstaller et de maintenir le systme.
Veuillez tenir compte des exigences de scurit ncessaires et contribuer la prvention des accidents de toutes
sortes par un comportement conscient des risques. Le Training Institute dcline toute responsabilit pour les
dangers menaant le corps et la vie / la vie et la sant et/ou les blessures pouvant rsulter d'actes contraires la
scurit.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
VII
Attenzione
In certe parti dellapparato sono presenti alte tensioni. In servizio, certi componenti possono raggiungere
temperature elevate.
La non osservanza di queste condizioni e delle istruzioni di sicurezza pu provocare incidenti alle persone o danni
allapparato.
Per questo linstallazione e la manutenzione del sistema deve essere affidata solo a personale qualificato e
preparato.
Assicurarsi che i requisiti di sicurezza siano soddisfatti e contribuire alla prevenzione di incidenti di qualsiasi tipo
tenendo sempre in considerazione i rischi presenti.
Il Training Institute declina ogni responsabilit relativa a danni alla salute e alla vita del personale conseguenza
di azioni ed interventi che non rispettano le procedure di sicurezza.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
VIII
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
1
INDEX
1 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.2.1 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
1.2.1.1 Warnings for the electrical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
1.2.1.2 Waste equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
1.2.2 External operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3
1.3 ESDS Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
2 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
2.1 List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
3.1 SRAL XD system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.2 System building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.3 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
3.4 Network Topologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
3.5 IDU-ODU Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
3.5.1 51.84 Mbit/s or 155.520 Mbit/s signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
3.5.2 ODU Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
3.6 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.6.1 1+0 supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
3.6.2 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
3.6.3 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by with integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . .3.4
3.6.4 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by with independent antenna . . . . . . . .3.4
4 PHYSICAL INTERFACES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
4.1 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.2 E1 Tributary signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.3 Ethernet (10/100 baseT) tributary signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.4 E3 tributary signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.5 WST signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.6 User channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
4.7 Alarm and remote control external lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
4.8 Monitoring of received RF power on the ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
4.9 Supervision interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
5 CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1
5.1 16xE1 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.2 32xE1 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.3 1xE3 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
5.4 ETH IDU ( 4xLAN + 8xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
5.5 Licence fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
5.6 Configuration summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.1
6.1 IDU ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2
6.1.1 IDU (16xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6.2 2 Mbit/s (16xE1) Tributary Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6.3 BB (16xE1) Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
6.4 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.5 IDU (32xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.5.1 2 Mbit/s (32xE1) Tributary Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.5.2 BB (32xE1) Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
6.5.3 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
6.6 IDU (1xE3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
6.6.1 34 Mbit/s (1xE3) Tributary Unit + 2 Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
6.6.2 BB (1xE3) Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
6.7 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
6.8 IDU (ETH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
6.8.1 4xLAN (10/100BaseT) + 8x2 Mbit/s (8xE1) Tributary Unit
(DATA INTERFACE UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
6.8.1.1 Data interface unit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
6.8.1.2 BB (16xE1) Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
6.8.1.3 Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
6.9 IDU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
6.9.1 IDU 16xE1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
6.9.2 IDU 1xE3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
6.9.3 IDU ETH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
6.10 IDU 32xE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
6.11 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
6.12 ODU ARCHITECTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
6.12.1 BB-I (Base-Band and Cable Interface) Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
6.12.2 Power Supply Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
6.12.3 Modem Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
6.12.4 Controller Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22
6.12.5 IF section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23
6.12.6 RF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23
6.12.7 ODU identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23
6.12.8 Vertical polarization application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24
6.12.9 Horizontal polarization application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24
6.12.10 Rx field measure connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24
7 PROTECTION SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.1 Tributary Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.2 Rx tributary Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.2.1 Tx tributary Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
7.2.2 Protection Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
7.2.3 Hardware protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
7.2.4 Hitless protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
8 SERVICE CHANNELS MANAGEMENT AND PROTECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
8.1 User channel (USR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3
8.1.1 Radio Embedded Communication Channel (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.2
8.1.2 Tributary Embedded Communication Channel (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.3
9 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1 16xE1 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9.1.1 Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1.2 Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.2 1xE3 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9.3 ETH IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
9.4 32xE1 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
10 ACTIVATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
10.1 PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
10.1.1 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
10.1.1.1 System E2PROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
10.2 ACTIVATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
10.2.1 Local checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
10.2.2 IDU first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.2
10.2.3 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
10.2.4 Local checks on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
10.2.4.1 Control of the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.3
10.2.4.2 Configuration of IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
10.2.5 Link checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
10.2.5.1 Final checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
10.2.5.2 Switching test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
10.2.5.3 Restore of the operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.4
10.3 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
10.3.1 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.5
10.3.2 Alarm conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.5
11 LOOP BACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1
11.1 Loop-backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
11.1.1 Tributary loop-backs (Fig. 11.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.1
12 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1
12.1 TROUBLESHOOTING AND RESTORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
12.1.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.1
12.1.2 Unit replacement procedures in 1+0 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
12.1.2.1 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
12.1.2.2 IDU-ODU cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
12.1.2.3 Replacement of the IDU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.2
12.1.2.4 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.3
12.1.2.5 IDU-ODU cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.4
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4
12.1.2.6 Replacement of the IDU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
12.1.3 Configuration change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5
12.2 LIST OF SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
12.2.1 IDU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
12.2.2 ODU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
12.3 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
12.3.1 Procedure for the IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
12.3.2 Procedure for the ODU replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11
13 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
13.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
13.1.1 ODU ND characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8
13.1.1.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8
13.1.1.2 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9
13.1.2 ODU HD/HP characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.10
13.1.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.10
13.1.2.2 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.11
13.1.3 ODU HDe characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13
13.1.3.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13
13.1.3.2 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.14
13.1.4 IDU characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
13.1.4.1 Protected configuration specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
13.1.4.2 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
13.1.4.3 Hardware alarm detection time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
13.1.4.4 Operational switching time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
13.1.4.5 Characteristics of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17
13.1.4.6 Characteristics of 34 Mbit/s tributary Interface (E3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17
13.1.4.7 Characteristics of Ethernet ports interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18
13.1.4.8 Characteristics of channel auxiliary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18
13.1.4.9 Power supply characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
13.1.5 Guaranteed consumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
13.1.6 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21
13.1.7 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.22
13.1.8 EMC/EMI characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.22
13.1.9 Safety characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23
13.1.10 Antenna P/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23
13.2 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED COAXIAL CABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
13.2.1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
13.3 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
13.3.1 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
13.3.2 Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
13.3.3 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. 3.1 SRAL XD equipment block diagram (with 16xE1 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Fig. 3.4 SRAL XD equipment block diagram (with ETH IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Fig. 3.5 1+0 system with 1 integrated antenna (Terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Fig. 3.6 1+0 system with 1 independent antenna (Terminal). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Fig. 3.7 2x(1+0) dual terminal system, Repeater A/D with 2 integrated antennas . . . . . 3.11
Fig. 3.8 2x(1+0) dual terminal system, Repeater A/D with 2 independent antennas. . . . 3.12
Fig. 3.9 1+1 FD, PD system with 2 integrated antennas (Terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Fig. 3.10 1+1 FD, PD system with 2 independent antennas (Terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Fig. 3.11 1+1 PD system with 1 independent antenna (Terminal). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Fig. 3.12 SRAL XD - 7/8 GHz: 1+1 H/S, FD system with 1 independent antenna
(Terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Fig. 3.13 SRAL XD - 13-38 GHz: 1+1 H/S system with 1 integrated antenna (Terminal) . 3.17
Fig. 3.14 SRAL XD - 13-38 GHz: 1+1 H/S system with 1 independent antenna
(Terminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Fig. 3.15 1+0 supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Fig. 3.16 1+1 supporting frame for frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Fig. 3.17 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Fig. 3.18 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Fig. 4.1 IDU physical interfaces (16xE1 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Fig. 4.2 IDU physical interfaces (32xE1 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Fig. 4.3 IDU physical interfaces (1xE3 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Fig. 4.4 IDU physical interfaces ( ETH IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Fig. 4.5 Network supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Fig. 5.1 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+0 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Fig. 5.2 SRAL XD equipment: dual terminal 2(1+0) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Fig. 5.3 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+1 H/S configuration (one antenna) . . . . 5.6
Fig. 5.4 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+1 PD configuration (one antenna) . . . . . 5.7
Fig. 5.5 SRAL XD equipment: Repeater with tributary Add/Drop (A/D-RPT)
configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Fig. 5.6 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+0 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Fig. 5.7 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+1 H/S configuration (one antenna) . . . 5.10
Fig. 5.8 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+1 PD configuration (one antenna) . . . . 5.11
Fig. 5.9 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+0 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Fig. 5.12 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+0 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6
Fig. 6.1 16xE1 IDU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.25
Fig. 6.2 Data interface unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26
Fig. 6.3 Access Board payload block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.27
Fig. 6.4 BaseBand Board payload block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.28
Fig. 6.5 1xE3 IDU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.29
Fig. 6.6 ETH IDU block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.30
Fig. 6.7 Data interface unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.31
Fig. 6.8 VLAN tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.32
Fig. 6.9 ODUs functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.33
Fig. 6.10 Tributary protection general block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.34
Fig. 6.11 Rx general protection block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.35
Fig. 6.12 (1+1) FD Tx section protection block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.36
Fig. 6.13 IDU front panel in (1+1 - 16xE1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.37
Fig. 6.14 IDU front panel in (1+1 - 1xE3) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.38
Fig. 6.15 IDU front panel in (1+1 - ETH ) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.39
Fig. 6.16 IDU front panel in (1+1 - 32xE1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.40
Fig. 6.17 Summary of the front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.41
Fig. 6.18 Base Band unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.42
Fig. 6.19 Controller unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.43
Fig. 6.20 1+1 FD: position of the switches and CH A and CH B LEDs switching on . . . . 6.44
Fig. 6.24 1+1 Hot Standby: position of the switches and CH A and CH B LEDs
switching on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48
switching on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.49
switching on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.50
switching on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.51
Fig. 6.28 ODUs functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.52
Fig. 6.29 Vertical polarization application (ODU Normal Density - ND and ODU
High Density enhanced HDe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.53
Fig. 6.30 Vertical polarization application (ODU High Density - HD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.54
Fig. 6.31 Horizontal polarization application (ODU Normal Density - ND and ODU
High Density enhanced - HDe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.55
Fig. 6.32 Horizontal polarization application (ODU High Density - HD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.56
Fig. 6.33 Rx field measure connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.57
Fig. 7.1 Tributary protection general block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Fig. 7.2 Rx general protection block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
Fig. 7.3 (1+1) FD Tx section protection block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
Fig. 7.4 (1+1) HS Tx section protection block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
Fig. 7.5 Tx protection in Hot-Standby configuration with one antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7
Fig. 7.6 Tx protection in Frequency Diversity configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . 7.12
Fig. 7.7 Rx Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Fig. 7.8 Alarms of Hardware protection logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
Fig. 7.9 Hardware protection logic architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Fig. 7.10 Alarms of Hitless protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
Fig. 7.11 Hitless Protection Logic Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
Fig. 8.1 1+1 configuration of User channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Fig. 8.2 2x(1+0) configuration of User channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Fig. 8.3 Repeater configuration of User channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
Fig. 8.4 1+1 configuration of R channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
Fig. 8.5 2x(1+0) configuration of R channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
Fig. 8.6 1+1 configuration of D channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
Fig. 8.7 2x(1+0) configuration of D channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10
Fig. 9.1 16xE1 IDU - Primary Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Fig. 9.2 16xE1 IDU - ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
Fig. 9.3 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections . . . . . 9.5
Fig. 9.4 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm (Sub-D) from 9 to 16 Tributary Connections . . . . 9.6
Fig. 9.5 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections . . . . . . 9.7
Fig. 9.6 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm (Sub-D) from 9 to 16 Tributary Connections . . . . . 9.8
Fig. 9.7 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s (75 ohm coax.) from 1 to 16 Tributary Connections . . . . . . 9.9
Fig. 9.8 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s (120 ohm LEMO) from 1 to 16 Tributary Connections . . . 9.10
Fig. 9.9 16xE1 IDU - Alarm connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
Fig. 9.10 16xE1 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext
(USER 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
Fig. 9.11 16xE1 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext
(USER 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
Fig. 9.12 16xE1 IDU - (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connnection . . . . 9.14
Fig. 9.13 16xE1 IDU - Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
Fig. 9.14 16xE1 IDU - Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
Fig. 9.15 16xE1 IDU - V-BUS Connection ( with Controller P/N 634-001/74) . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
Fig. 9.16 16xE1 IDU - LCT connection (RS 232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
Fig. 9.17 1xE3 IDU - Primary Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
Fig. 9.18 1xE3 IDU - ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
Fig. 9.19 1xE3 IDU - 34 Mbit/s tributary connections (75 ohm coax.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
Fig. 9.20 1xE3 IDU - 2 Mbit/s WST Signal connections (75 ohm coax.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
Fig. 9.21 1xE3 IDU - Alarm connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
Fig. 9.22 1xE3 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext
(USER 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24
Fig. 9.23 1xE3 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext
(USER 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25
Fig. 9.24 1xE3 IDU - (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connection . . . . . . 9.26
Fig. 9.25 1xE3 IDU - Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
Fig. 9.26 1xE3 IDU - Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
Fig. 9.27 1xE3 IDU - V-BUS Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8
Fig. 9.28 1xE3 IDU - LCT connection (RS 232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
Fig. 9.29 ETH IDU - Primary Power Supply Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.31
Fig. 9.30 ETH IDU - ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.32
Fig. 9.31 ETH IDU - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections . . . . . . 9.33
Fig. 9.32 ETH IDU - 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections . . . . . 9.34
Fig. 9.33 ETH IDU - 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Lan Ports (RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.35
Fig. 9.34 ETH IDU - Alarm connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.36
Fig. 9.35 ETH IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext (USER 1) 9.37
Fig. 9.36 ETH IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext (USER 2) 9.38
Fig. 9.37 ETH IDU - (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connection . . . . . . 9.39
Fig. 9.38 ETH IDU - Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.40
Fig. 9.39 ETH IDU - Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.41
Fig. 9.40 ETH IDU - V-BUS Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.42
Fig. 9.41 ETH IDU - LCT connection (RS 232). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.43
Fig. 9.42 Primary Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.44
Fig. 9.43 ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.45
Fig. 9.44 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm (MiniRJ21) from 1 to 8 / 9 to 16 / 17 to 24 / 25 to 32 Tributary
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.46
Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.47
Fig. 9.46 Alarm connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.48
Fig. 9.47 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext (USER 1) . . . . . . . . 9.50
Fig. 9.48 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext (USER 2) . . . . . . . . 9.51
Fig. 9.49 (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.52
Fig. 9.50 Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.53
Fig. 9.51 Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.54
Fig. 9.52 V-BUS Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.55
Fig. 9.53 V-BUS Connection example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.56
Fig. 10.1 IDU Key position (16xE1 Tributary unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Fig. 10.2 IDU Key position (1xE3 Tributary unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
Fig. 10.3 IDU Key position (ETH Tributary unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
Fig. 10.4 IDU Key position (32xE1 Tributary unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
Fig. 10.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (16xE1) 10.10
Fig. 10.6 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (1xE3) . 10.11
Fig. 10.7 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (ETH) . 10.12
Fig. 10.8 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (32xE1) 10.13
Fig. 11.1 Tributary loop-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Fig. 12.1 IDU assembly LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12
Fig. 12.2 Ethernet tributary unit LAN Ports LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13
Fig. 12.3 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14
Fig. 13.1 ETSI Block diagram of Tx RF side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.32
Fig. 13.2 Mask of the RF signal for 7 to 38 GHz ODU ND according to the traffic
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.33
Fig. 13.3 ETSI Block diagram of Rx RF side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.34
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9
Fig. 13.4 ETSI Block diagram of Tx RF side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.35
Fig. 13.5 Mask of the RF signal for 7 to 38 GHz ODU (HP mode) according to the
traffic capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.36
Fig. 13.6 Mask of the RF signal for 23, 26, 28 and 38 GHz ODU (HD mode) according
to the traffic capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.37
Fig. 13.7 Mask of the RF signal for 7, 8,15 and 18 GHz ODU (HD mode) according
to the traffic capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.38
Fig. 13.8 ETSI Block diagram of Rx RF side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.39
Fig. 13.9 ETSI Block diagram of Tx RF side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.40
Fig. 13.10Mask of the RF signal for 18, 23 and 38 GHz ODU (ND mode) according to
the traffic capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.41
Fig. 13.11Mask of the RF signal for 18 Ghz ODU (HD mode) or 23, 38 GHz ODU
(HD mode) according to the traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.42
Fig. 13.12ETSI Block diagram of Rx RF side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.43
Fig. 13.13Shape of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.44
Fig. 13.14Shape of 34 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.45
Fig. 13.15Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.46
Fig. 13.16Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.47
Fig. 13.17Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU-ODU storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.48
Fig. 13.18Braided coaxial cable - IDU/ODU tipical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.49
Fig. 13.191/4 coaxial cable - IDU/ODU tipical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.50
Fig. 13.201/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.51
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
11
LIST OF TABLES
Tab. 3.1 System configurations for SRAL XD equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Tab. 5.1 Configuration summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Tab. 6.1 Plug-in 16xE1 IDU composition P/N 732-101/61 (Controller unit
P/N 634-001/73 equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
P/N 634-001/74 equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
Tab. 6.3 Plug-in 1xE3 IDU composition P/N 732-101/61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17
Tab. 6.4 Plug-in ETH IDU composition P/N 732-101/61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18
Tab. 6.5 Plug-in 32xE1 IDU composition P/N 732-101/62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
Tab. 6.6 Summary of the front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
Tab. 8.1 User channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Tab. LCT connector (RS 232). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
Tab. 10.1KEY alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
Tab. 12.1List of spare parts - 16xE1 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
Tab. 12.2List of spare parts - ETH IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
Tab. 12.3List of spare parts - 1xE3 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
Tab. 12.4List of spare parts - 32xE1 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tab. 12.5ODU HD/HP 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tab. 12.6ODU HD/HP 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tab. 12.7ODU HD/HP 15 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tab. 12.8ODU HD/HP 18 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tab. 12.9ODU HD/HP 23 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
Tab. 12.10ODU HD/HP 26 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Tab. 12.11ODU HD/HP 28 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Tab. 12.12ODU HD/HP 38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Tab. 12.13ODU HD/HP Low Power 38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Tab. 12.14ODU ND 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Tab. 12.15ODU ND 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
Tab. 12.16ODU ND 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.17ODU ND 15 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.18ODU ND 18 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.19ODU ND 23 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.20ODU ND 26 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.21ODU ND 28 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.22ODU ND 38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
Tab. 12.23ODU HDe 18 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
Tab. 12.24ODU HDe 23 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
Tab. 12.25ODU HDe 38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
Tab. 12.26ODU HDe Low Power 38 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
Tab. 13.1Antenna P/N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12
Tab. 13.2Construction characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
Tab. 13.3Mechanical characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
Tab. 13.4Range of temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24
Tab. 13.5Electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
Tab. 13.6Attenuation, (dB/100) Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 24C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
Tab. 13.7Average Power Rating, kW Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 40C; inner conductor temperature 100C; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26
Tab. 13.8Andrew set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
Tab. 13.9RFS-Kabelmetal set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
Tab. 13.10Construction characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
Tab. 13.11Mechanical characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
Tab. 13.12Range of temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
Tab. 13.13Electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.29
Tab. 13.14Attenuation, (dB/100m) Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 24C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.30
Tab. 13.15Average Power Rating, kW Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 40C; inner conductor temperature 100C; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.31
Tab. RF signal attenuation limit values (23, 26, 28 and 38 GHz - HD) . . . . . . . . . . 13.37
Tab. RF signal attenuation limit values (7, 8, 15 and 18 GHz - HD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.38
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
1-1
1 Safety Rules
1.1 General
This document contains all the safety rules and the correct precautions to be followed during
operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to the equipment
components.
1.2 Safety rules
The equipment complies with the 89/336/EEC European specification.
The equipment is preconfigured for supply from station batteries (-48 VDC 20%); then follow
the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.
1.2.1 Electrical safety
1.2.1.1 Warnings for the electrical safety
The equipment complies with the CEI EN 60950-1 safety specifications.
The equipment must be installed, started up, managed and repaired only by properly
trained personnel.
G Before supplying the equipment, it is necessary to complete the wiring of the connections
to the protection ground, the insertion of all the units and/or modules provided for the re-
quested configuration and also the connection of all the necessary connectors.
G The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.
1.2.1.2 Waste equipment management
The radio equipment at the end of its life can be classified as 16 02 14 equipment out of use
different from the equipment listed in 16 02 09 to 16 02 13 according to the dangerous was-
te list determined in article 1 para. 4 of Government Recc. 91/689/EEC on the dangerous waste
updated in Recc. 2001/118/EC.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
1-2
The equipment does not include:
G Cadmium
G Mercury
G Asbestos
G Radioactive materials
G PCB
G Berillium
INFORMATION TO USER (FOR ITALIAN MARKET ONLY)
According to the art. 13 of the legislative decree, D.Lgs nr. 151 of the 25th of july 2005.
"adopting directives 2002/95/CE, 2002/96/CE e 2003/108/CE, releted on the restriction of the use
of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment, and on disposal of
electrical and electronic waste".
The crossed-out bin symbol on equipment, means that the product, at the end of its useful life, must
be disposed separately from the municipal waste. User should return it to the municipalities collection
system or to the ratailers if you buy a new equivalent product.
Differentiated waste of old appliances will result in recycling, treatment and environmental compatible
disposal, which will help to prevent potential negative consequences on the environment and human
health and consequently the reuse of renewable raw material
The misdemenour of the disposal will lead to financial penalties as defined in artt. 50 onwards, of the
legislative decree nr. 22 of the 5th of february 1997.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
1-3
1.2.2 External operations
Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outside during the
equipment installation and starting up phase.
During the execution of such operations, it is necessary to follow strictly the safety rules listed
here below:
G During installation, while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rod are lif-
ted, it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area. Such an area must be
properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules.
G For the external operations to be executed on the antenna, on the frame and on the ODU,
all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operators must be respec-
ted, according to the on force rules. For example, it is necessary to use protection fences
and belts.
G During the equipment starting up phase, the operators must not be in front of the antenna.
If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected, some injuries to the
personnel can be caused.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
1-4
1.3 ESDS Precautions
The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially or
permanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operating
environment.
The main ESDS devices are:
CMOS components
Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology
SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components
Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs
MOS/FET components and arrays
Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz
Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:
In order avoid any damage while handling the modules, the user should wear an
antistatic elastic bracelet, grounded by means a spiral cord.
Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be
stores in their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-1
2 Glossary
2.1 List of abbreviations
A/D-RPT
Add/Drop Repeater
AC
Alternating Current
ACI
Adjacent Channel Interference
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
ALM
Alarm
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
AUX
Auxiliary
BB
Base Band
BER
Bit Error Rate
BOL
Beginning Of Life
BSC
Basic Station Center
BTS
Basic Terminal Station
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-2
CCI
Co-Channel Interference
CH
Channel
CMD
Command
CPM
Continuous Phase Modulation
CW
Continuous Wave
D/A
Digital/Analog
DC
Direct Current
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
DEM
Demodulator
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
EM
ElectroMagnetic
EN
Enable
EOL
End Of Life
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-3
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
E&M
Ear and Mouth
ESDS
Electro Static Discharge Sensitive
ETH
Ethernet
EXT
External
FD
Frequency Diversity
FEC
Forward Error Corrector
GA
Gate Array
GND
Ground
H
High
H/S
Hot-Standby
HD
High Density
HDB3
High Density Bipolar 3
HDLC
High Data Link Control
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-4
HL
Hitless
HP
High Performance
HW
Hardware
I/O
Input/Output
IC
Integrated Circuit
ID
Identifier
IDU
Indoor Unit
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IN
Input
IND
Indicative
INT
Internal
ITMN
Installation Test Manual
L
Low
LAN
Local Area Network
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-5
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
LSI
Large Scale Integration
MEM
Memorization
MOD
Modulator
MSC
Mobile Service switching Center
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
ND
Normal Density
NE
Network Element
NRZ
Not Return-to-Zero
NURG
Not Urgent
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OMC
Operation & Maintenance Center
OSI
Open System Interconnection
OUT
Output
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-6
OW
Overflow
PC
Personal Computer
PD
Polarization Diversity
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PLL
Phase Lock Loop
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
RF
Radio Frequency
RIEP
Recapitulary
RPT
Repeater
RS
Reed Solomon
Rx
Reception
S/I
Sensitivity/Interference
SLIC
Subscriber Line Circuit
SRAL
Low capacity Siemens Radio Access
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-7
SW
Software
TCM
Trellis Code Modulation
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
TRIB
Tributary
TS
Service telephone
Tx
Transmission
UHF
Ultra High Frequency
URG
Urgent
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
2-8
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-1
3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1 SRAL XD system
In this Training Manual is described the SRAL XD system operating at 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 13 GHz,
15 GHz, 18 GHz, 23 GHz, 26 GHz, 28 GHz and 38 GHz with the plug-in IDU only with the fol-
lowing traffic capacity:
G 2E1
G 4E1
G 8E1
G 16E1
G 32xE1
G 1xE3 + 1WST
G 4xEthernet Interfaces (10/100 BaseT) + 8xE1
The 2 Mbit/s capacity, having the channel arrangement like the one of 2x2 Mbit/s capacity, is
derived from 2x2 Mbit/s option.
3.2 System building
Fig. 3.1 shows the SRAL XD (with 16xE1 IDU) equipment block diagram while Fig. 3.3 shows
the SRAL XD (with 32xE1 IDU) equipment block diagram, Fig. 3.3 shows the SRAL XD (with
1xE3 IDU) equipment block diagram, Fig. 3.4 shows the SRAL XD (with the 4 Ethernet + 8xE1
IDU) equipment block diagram.
The equipment has been realized by physically subdividing it into two assemblies: one for out-
door installation (ODU) and one for indoor installation (IDU).
This subdivision allows:
G the RF losses, due to the interconnection between ODU and the antenna, to be minimized
G a common IDU, for all the applications to be realized.
According to the configurations, one or two ODUs can be equipped.
The connection between IDU and ODU is made through a single coaxial cable.
It is possible to use antennas with diameter dependently of the hop lenght to be realized.
The ODU is available in two versions:
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-2
G Normal Density (ND) able to perform traditional channel arrangements 2/4/8/16xE1/1xE3
in 3.5/7/14/28/28 MHz via 4 CPM modulation format.
G High Density/High Performance (HD/HP) able to perform both High Density arrange-
ments (8/16xE1/1xE3 in 7/14/14 MHz), via 16 TCM modulation format, and Normal Density
arrangements (2/4/8/16xE1/1xE3 in 3.5/7/14/28/28 MHz), via 4 QAM modulation format.
Normal Density arrangement performed by ODU HD/HP is named High Performance since
it provides improved system gain in comparison to ODU ND.
G High Density enhanced (HDe) able to perform both High Density arrangements
(8/16xE1/32xE1 in 7/14/28 MHz), via 16 TCM modulation format, and Normal Density ar-
rangements (4/8/16xE1 in 7/14/28 MHz), via 4 QAM modulation format.
3.3 System configurations
For the SRAL XD equipment the configurations (system types) are provided as listed in the fol-
lowing table.
Tab. 3.1 System configurations for SRAL XD equipment
1) Configurations not available for 1xE3 capacity and 4xLan+8xE1 capacity.
3.4 Network Topologies
Possible topologies of the SRAL XD equipment are shown in UMN Manual.
3.5 IDU-ODU Interconnection
The interconnection between the IDU (with 16x2 BB unit) and the ODU (Fig. 3.5 to Fig. 3.14)
consists of only one two-way line transporting one composite signal comprising the
51.84 Mbit/s IDU-ODU stream and of the ODU power supply voltage.
System type Denomination Ref. Note
1+0 1+0 single terminal Fig. 3.5
2(1+0)
A/D-RPT
2(1+0) dual terminal or Add/Drop repeater
with 2 antennas
Fig. 3.6 and Fig. 3.7 1
1+1 PD
1+1 FD
1+1 H/S
1+1 single terminal system with 1 antenna Fig. 3.11, Fig. 3.10,
Fig. 3.12 and Fig. 3.13
1+1 PD, FD 1+1 single terminal system with 2 antennas Fig. 3.8 and Fig. 3.9
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-3
The interconnection between the IDU (with 32x2 BB unit) and the ODU consists of only one
two-way line transporting one composite signal comprising the 155.520 Mbit/s IDU-ODU
stream and of the ODU power supply voltage.
3.5.1 51.84 Mbit/s or 155.520 Mbit/s signal
With regard to the transmission/reception of the 51.84 or 155.520 Mbit/s stream, the IDU-ODU
link consists of an active hybrid.
The active hybrid on the transmission path allows to forward the 51.84 or 155.520 Mbit/s
stream to the output i.e., either towards the ODU or towards the IDU. Afterwards, by means of
the properly connected operational amplifiers the cited signal will be suppressed on the receive
side (i.e., towards the unit proper).
The signal that has been received from the ODU (or from the IDU) is sent to the Receive Cir-
cuits via the active hybrid.
A 128 kbit/s auxiliary channel is present on the 51.84 or 155.520 Mbit/s stream connecting the
IDU and the ODU. The channel also transports all the data necessary for the equipment to ope-
rate properly (alarms, data channel, etc.).
3.5.2 ODU Power Supply
The IDU-ODU interconnection cable also transports the auxiliary DC voltage, required to power
the ODU, which is supplied by the corresponding BB 16xE1/32xE1/1xE3 unit of the IDU. In this
unit are also present the soft-start circuits, the current limitation circuit and the generation of
the open cable alarm or short-circuited cable alarm.
3.6 Supporting frame
3.6.1 1+0 supporting frame
The 1+0 supporting frame (Fig. 3.15) consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant wavegui-
de accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+0 configuration.
From an electrical point of view the frame is a passive device (i.e. waveguide section) that pro-
vides interconnection between its two ports with negligible insertion loss.
The 1+0 supporting frame is used (quantity: 2) also in 1+1 and 2x(1+0) configurations with 2
antennas.
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-4
3.6.2 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity
The 1+1 supporting frame from frequency diversity (Fig. 3.16) consists of a mechanical struc-
ture, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit
in 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration.
The two ODU parts are interconnected to the antenna port through a circulator. Both the ODUs
transmit at the same time, delivering the signal on two RF channels at different frequecies on
the same polarisation.
3.6.3 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by with integrated antenna
The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by (Fig. 3.17) consists of a mechanical structure, and
relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+1
HSBY (Hot Stand-by) unbalanced or balanced configuration.
From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame is a balanced or unbalanced coupler. The signal
incoming from the antenna port is split unbalanced-wise the two ODUs.
3.6.4 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by with independent antenna
The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by (Fig. 3.18) consists of a mechanical structure, and
relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+1
HSBY (Hot Stand-by) unbalanced or balanced configuration.
From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame is a balanced or unbalanced coupler. The signal
incoming from the antenna port is split unbalanced-wise the two ODUs.
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-5
Fig. 3.1 SRAL XD equipment block diagram (with 16xE1 IDU)
ODU
F Interface
IDU Basic functions:
System interfacing to external world
Baseband digital signal processing
IDU-ODU cable interface
management (from/to ODU)
Supervision and
configuration/management of the
equipment
Equipments power supply
management
Control and
supervision
signals and
channels
ODU Basic functions:
IDU-ODU cable interface management
Modulation of baseband digital signal
(from IDU)
Demodulation of the received RF signal
(to IDU)
Supervision and
configuration/management of the ODU
Management of comm. channel from/to
IDU CONTROLLER
RSSI Interface (Received Signal
Strength Indication) to measure the RF
received signal
V-LAN Interface
Q-LAN Interface
ALM Interface
E1 Interfaces
USER-1 Interface
USER-2 Interface
PS Interface
Tributary
and
services
signals
(payload)
IDU
IDU-ODU
interconnection
(coaxial cable)
IDU-CABLE
interface
ODU-CABLE
interface
RSSI
interface
ANTENNA
interface
RF
interface
Integrated antenna
V-BUS(*) Interface
(*) This interface is available with Controller (P/N 634-001/74) only
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-6
ODU
F Interface
Supervision and
equipment
management
Control
and su-
pervision
signals
and
channels
management
(from IDU)
Demodulation of the received RF
signal (to IDU)
Supervision and
ODU
Management of comm. channel
from/to IDU CONTROLLER
Strength Indication) to measure the
RF received signal
V-LAN Interface
Q-LAN Interface
ALM Interface
E1 Interfaces
USER-1 Interface
USER-2 Interface
PS Interface
Tributary
and
services
signals
(payload)
IDU
IDU-ODU
interconnection
(coaxial cable)
IDU-CABLE
interface
ODU-CABLE
interface
RSSI
interface
ANTENNA
interface
RF
interface
Integrated antenna
V-BUS Interface
32
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-7
ODU
F Interface
System interfacing to external
world
Baseband digital signal
processing
Supervision and
equipment
Control and
supervision
signals and
channels
V-LAN Interface
Q-LAN Interface
ALM Interface
E3 Interface
USER-1 Interface
USER-2 Interface
PS Interface
Tributary
and
services
signals
(payload)
IDU
IDU-ODU
interconnection
(coaxial cable)
IDU-CABLE
interface
ODU-CABLE
interface
RSSI
interface
ANTENNA
interface
RF
interface
Integrated antenna
V-BUS Interface
WST Interface
IDU-ODU cable interface management
Modulation of baseband digital signal (from
IDU)
Demodulation of the received RF signal (to
IDU)
Supervision and configuration/management
of the ODU
Management of comm. channel from/to IDU
CONTROLLER
RSSI Interface (Received Signal Strength
Indication) to measure the RF received
signal
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-8
Fig. 3.4 SRAL XD equipment block diagram (with ETH IDU)
ODU
F Interface
Supervision and
equipment
management
Control
and su-
pervision
signals
and chan-
nels
management
(from IDU)
Demodulation of the received RF
signal (to IDU)
Supervision and
ODU
Management of comm. channel
from/to IDU CONTROLLER
Strength Indication) to measure the
V-LAN Interface
Q-LAN Interface
ALM Interface
E1 Interfaces
USER-1 Interface
USER-2 Interface
PS Interface
Tributary
and
services
signals
(payload)
IDU
IDU-ODU
interconnection
(coaxial cable)
IDU-CABLE
interface
RSSI
interface
ANTENNA
interface
RF
interface
Integrated antenna
V-BUS Interface
ETH Interfaces
4
8
ODU-CABLE
interface
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-9
Fig. 3.5 1+0 system with 1 integrated antenna (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
ALMs USER/Dext USER/Dext
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
M
C
J
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
/ S ' W T
N M T E
ODUCABLE
/
C
A H D O
U
C B L H B
C '
PS
ODUCABLE ODU CABLE
CAUTION Vbattery
H A
C C
B H L B C
U
O D ' PS
' T S E T
W
M
/ N
J
C / M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT USER/Dext USER/Dext ALMs
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
-
STATUS LINE
TEL II _II
_ LCT
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EOW V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
-
STATUS LINE
TEL II _II
_ LCT
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EOW V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
16xE1 / 32xE1 / ETH IDU
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-10
Fig. 3.6 1+0 system with 1 independent antenna (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE H A
C C
B H L B C
U
O D ' PS
' T S E T
W
M
/ N
J
C / M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
-
STATUS LINE
TEL II _II
_ LCT
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EOW V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
-
STATUS LINE
TEL II _II
_ LCT
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EOW V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-11
Fig. 3.7 2x(1+0) dual terminal system, Repeater A/D with 2 integrated antennas
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
M
C
J
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
/ S ' W T
NM TE /
C
A H DO
U
CBL HB
C
'
PS
ODU CABLE C
A H CBL HB
C DO
U '
PS
ODU CABLE
PWR- 48V
-
STATUS
LINE
TEL II _II
_ LCT
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EOW V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
16xE1 IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-12
Fig. 3.8 2x(1+0) dual terminal system, Repeater A/D with 2 independent antennas
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
M
C
J
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
/ S ' W T
NM TE /
C
A H DO
U
CBL HB
C
'
PS
ODU CABLE C
A H CBL HB
C DO
U '
PS
ODU CABLE
PWR- 48V
-
STATUS
LINE
TEL II _II
_ LCT
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EOW V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
16xE1 IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-13
Fig. 3.9 1+1 FD, PD system with 2 integrated antennas (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE H A
C C
B H L B C
U
O D ' PS
' T S E T
W
M
/ N
J
C / M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S
TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-14
Fig. 3.10 1+1 FD, PD system with 2 independent antennas (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE H A
C C
B H L B C
U
O D ' PS
' T S E T
W
M
/ N
J
C / M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN LCT USER/Dext USER/Dext ALMs
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________ EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________ EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-15
Fig. 3.11 1+1 PD system with 1 independent antenna (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE H A
C C
B H L B C
U
O D ' PS
' T S E T
W
M
/ N
J
C / M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-16
Fig. 3.12 SRAL XD - 7/8 GHz: 1+1 H/S, FD system with 1 independent antenna (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE H A
C C
B H LB C
U
OD ' PS
' T S ET
W
M
/ N
J
C/ M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-17
Fig. 3.13 SRAL XD - 13-38 GHz: 1+1 H/S system with 1 integrated antenna (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE H A
C C
B H L B C
U
O D ' PS
' T S E T
W
M
/ N
J
C / M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S
TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-18
Fig. 3.14 SRAL XD - 13-38 GHz: 1+1 H/S system with 1 independent antenna (Terminal)
Rx1
Tx1
Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
I 0
SRAL XD
Q-LAN
s
V-LAN
LCT
PS
ODU CABLE HA
C C
BH LBC
U
OD ' PS
' T SET
W
M
/ N
J
C/ M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
Tx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
PWR- 48V
+ -
STATUS LINE
I N S TEL ' II _II
_ LCT
______
4 WIRE + E&M ______________________
EXP1
EOW
V . 1 1 L I N E 2
V . 1 1 L I N E 1
I EXP2 I
1xE3 IDU
OR
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-19
Fig. 3.15 1+0 supporting frame
ODU
Waveguide Frame
B
A
1+0 supporting frame
Code Freq.
Band
(GHz)
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-108/69 7 7.1 - 7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84
534-108/69 8 7.7 - 8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84
534-108/71 13 12.75-13.25 WR 75 R120 UBR120 PBR120
534-108/72 15 14.4 - 15.35 WR62 R140 UBR140 PBR140
534-108/73 18 17.7 - 19.7 WR42 R220 UBR220 PBR220
534-108/73 23 21.2 - 23.6 WR42 R220 UBR220 PBR220
534-108/73 26 24.5 - 26.5 WR42 R220 UBR220 PBR220
534-108/74 28 27.5 - 29.5 WR28 R320 UBR320 PBR320
534-108/74 38 37.5 - 39.5 WR28 R320 UBR320 PBR320
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-20
Fig. 3.16 1+1 supporting frame for frequency diversity
1+1 supporting frame for frequency diversity
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B, C
Flange
type
Insertion
Loss
(dB)
Isolation
(dB)
534-108/80 7 7.1 - 7.9 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84
< 0.3 > 20
< 0.2 > 26
534-108/81 8 7.7 - 8.5 WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84
< 0.3 > 20
< 0.2 > 26
ODU
Circulator Frame
C
A
ODU
B
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-21
Fig. 3.17 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by
1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by with integrated antenna
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Coupler
type
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
Coupling
(dB)
Insertion
loss
(dB)
534-120/07 7 7.1-7.9 unbal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84 < 11 < 1
534-120/17 7 7.1-7.9 bal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84 < 3.3 -
534-120/07 8 7.7-8.5 unbal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84 < 11 < 1
534-120/17 8 7.7-8.5 bal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84 < 3.3 -
534-120/09 13 12.75-13.25 unbal. WR75 R120 UBR120 PBR120 < 11 < 1.2
534-120/19 13 12.75-13.25 bal. WR75 R120 UBR120 PBR120 < 3.3 -
534-120/01 15 14.4-15.35 unbal. WR62 R140 UBR140 UBR140 < 11 < 1.3
534-120/11 15 14.4-15.35 bal. WR62 R140 UBR140 UBR140 < 3.3 -
534-120/02 18 17.7-19.7 unbal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 11 < 1.3
534-120/12 18 17.7-19.7 bal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 3.3 -
534-120/03 23 21.2-23.6 unbal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 11 < 1.3
534-120/13 23 21.2-23.6 bal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 3.3 -
534-120/04 26 24.5-26.5 unbal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 11 < 1.3
534-120/14 26 24.5-26.5 bal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 3.3 -
534-120/05 28 27.5-29.5 unbal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 11 < 1.5
534-120/15 28 27.5-29.5 bal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 3.3 -
534-120/06 38 37.5-39.5 unbal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 11 < 1.5
534-120/16 38 37.5-39.5 bal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 3.3 -
ODU
Coupler Frame
C
A
ODU
B
IMC 00031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
3-22
Fig. 3.18 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by
1+1 Supporting frame for Hot stand-by with independent antenna
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Coupler
type
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
Coupling
(dB)
Insertion
loss
(dB)
534-108/82
or
534-121/07
7 7.1-7.9 unbal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84
8.5-11.5
< 11
< 1
< 1.2
534-121/17 7 7.1-7.9 bal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84 < 3.3 -
534-108/83
or
534-121/07
8 7.7-8.5 unbal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84
8.5-11.5
< 11
< 1
< 1.2
534-121/17 8 7.7-8.5 bal. WR112 R84 UDR84 PDR84 < 3.3 -
534-108/85
or
534-121/09
13 12.75-13.25 unbal. WR75 R120 UBR120 PBR120
8.5-11.5
< 11
< 1
< 1.4
534-121/19 13 12.75-13.25 bal. WR75 R120 UBR120 PBR120 < 3.3 -
534-121/01 15 14.4-15.35 unbal. WR62 R140 UBR140 UBR140 < 11 < 1.5
534-121/11 15 14.4-15.35 bal. WR62 R140 UBR140 UBR140 < 3.3 -
534-121/02 18 17.7-19.7 unbal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 11 < 1.5
534-121/12 18 17.7-19.7 bal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 3.3 -
534-121/03 23 21.2-23.6 unbal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 11 < 1.5
534-121/13 23 21.2-23.6 bal. WR42 R220 UBR220 UBR220 < 3.3 -
534-121/04 26 24.5-26.5 unbal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 11 < 1.5
534-121/14 26 24.5-26.5 bal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 3.3 -
534-121/05 28 27.5-29.5 unbal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 11 < 1.7
534-121/15 28 27.5-29.5 bal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 3.3 -
534-121/06 38 37.5-39.5 unbal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 11 < 1.7
534-121/16 38 37.5-39.5 bal. WR28 R320 UBR320 UBR320 < 3.3 -
ODU
Coupler Frame
C
A
ODU
B
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-1
4 PHYSICAL INTERFACES
Refer to Fig. 4.1 for the 16xE1 IDU unit, refer to Fig. 4.3 for the 32xE1 IDU, refer to Fig. 4.4 1xE3
IDU and refer to Fig. 4.5 for the ETH IDU.
4.1 Power supply
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a redundant input line for the connection of the power
supply batteries to the equipment.
4.2 E1 Tributary signals
G IDU 16xE1
The IDU makes available at the outside (on the front panel of the 16xE1 IDU) 8 or 16 I/O
lines for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries as per G.703, with 75 Ohm unbalanced or 120 Ohm balan-
ced interface.
G IDU 32xE1
The IDU makes available at the outside (on the front panel of the 32xE1 IDU) 32 I/O lines
for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries as per G.703, with 75 Ohm unbalanced or 120 Ohm balanced
interface.
4.3 Ethernet (10/100 baseT) tributary signals
The IDU makes available at the outside (on the front panel of the ETH IDU) 4 LAN Ports Ether-
net (10/100 baseT).
4.4 E3 tributary signal
The IDU makes available at the outside (on the front panel of the 1xE3 IDU) one I/O line for the
34 Mbit/s tributary as per G.703, with 75 Ohm unbalanced interface.
4.5 WST signal
The IDU makes available at the outside (on the front panel of the 1xE3 IDU) one I/O line for the
2 Mbit/s WST as per G.703, with 75 Ohm unbalanced interface to user defined application.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-2
4.6 User channel
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel (V.11) (on the
front panel of the 16xE1/32xE1/ETH or 1xE3 IDUs) for applications defined by the user (examp-
le the use of External EOW).
The SRAL XD system only executes a point-to-point channel carrying and it is absolutely trans-
parent to the channel contents.
The user channel can be configured in two different modes:
G Contradirectional: clock associated with the input data stream originated by BB unit and it
is delivered to an external equipment
G Co-directional: clock associated with the input data stream originated by an external equip-
ment and delivered to BB unit.
The user channel configuration is an action controlled through software, carried out by the Con-
troller unit.
4.7 Alarm and remote control external lines
The IDU is provided with an alarm interface delivering to the outside some signal lines asso-
ciated with the two main functions:
G transparent carrying, through the radio link, of up to 4 alarm/command lines delivered to
the outside (e.g., alarm of open door, smoke alarm, switching commands, etc.)
G sending of 7 output alarms relevant to the equipment status.
4.8 Monitoring of received RF power on the ODU
The ODU has a monitoring point by which it is possible to measure the received radio signal
field.
4.9 Supervision interfaces
The following logical interfaces are available in order to allow complete networking among dif-
ferent NEs of SRAL XD family:
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-3
G F interface
The F interface is used to allow SRAL XD <--> LCT connection, i.e. the connection
among the SRAL XD type NE and the PC, which can be locally connected to the equip-
ment in order to perform supervision and configuration of the local node. An example of F
interface usage is shown in Fig. 4.5.
G R interface
The R interface is used to allow SRAL XD <--> SRAL XD when the NEs are not located
in the same station and are the terminals of one radio link (i. e., only radio connection is
available among the NEs). The R interface is internal to the equipment, and is not acces-
sible to the user. An example of R interface usage is shown in Fig. 4.5
G V-BUS interface (with P/N 634-001/74 Controller only)
The IDU makes available a 128 kbit/s data bus with burst mode (HDLC frame) to connect
the Controller unit to other Controller units belonging to other equipment installed in the
same station.
G V-LAN interface
The V-LAN interface is used to allow SRAL XD <--> SRAL XD/SRAL XD networking
for supervision purposes, when the NEs are placed in the same location and they are not
terminals of the same radio link (i. e. only cable connection is available among the NEs).
Examples of V-LAN interface usage are shown in Fig. 4.5.
G Q-LAN interface
The Q-LAN interface:
G is used to allow SRAL XD <--> SRAL XD/SRAL XD networking for supervision
purposes, when the NEs are placed in the same location and they are not terminals of
the same radio link (i. e. only cable connection is available among the NEs) and V-
LAN interface is not available (i.e., Q-LAN and V-LAN permit daisy chaining of the
TMN supervision channel);
G is used to allow SRAL XD <--> TMN Operation Support System OSS direct connec-
tion for supervision purposes.
Examples of Q-LAN interface usage are shown in Fig. 4.5.
The F interface can also be used to extend a SRAL network with SRAL XD NE
as shown in station C in Fig. 4.5.
If the V-BUS interface is used in the 32xE1/1xE3/ETH IDU, the V-LAN interface
will be not available.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-4
G D interface
The D interface is used to connect two NEs, which belong to disjoined radio networks. An
example of D interface usage is shown in Fig. 4.5. The D interface is internal to the
equipment, and is not accessible to the user.
The D channel of SRAL XD equipment is transmitted using a 64 kbit/s slot selected
among those of E1 tributary number #1 or transmitted in alternative to the 64 kbit/s user
channel.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-5
Fig. 4.1 IDU physical interfaces (16xE1 IDU)

PS1 PS2

(optional)

USER1

USER2
E1

V-LAN Q-LAN F
ALM
IDU-CABLE
(optional)

IDU-CABLE

V-BUS
(*)
Power supply BUS
Control BUS
Signal BUS
TRIButary
(TRIB)
Section
System
CONTROLLER
(CONTROL)
Section
Base-Band
no. 1
(BB1)
Section
Base-Band
no. 2
(BB1)
Section
(Optional)
IDUs Interfaces
(**) This interface can be used for External EOW connection in 1+0 / 1+1 / A/D /2+0 IDU configurations
(***) This interface can be used for External EOW connection in 2+0 IDU configuration only
(**) (***)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-6

PS1 PS2

(optional)

USER1

USER2
E1

V-LAN Q-LAN F
ALM
IDU-CABLE
(optional)

IDU-CABLE

V-BUS
(*)
Power supply BUS
Control BUS Signal BUS
TRIButary
(TRIB)
Section
System
CONTROLLER
(CONTROL)
Section
Base-Band
no. 1
(BB1)
Section
Base-Band
no. 2
(BB1)
Section
(Optional)
IDUs Interfaces
(*) This interface can be used for External EOW connection in 1+0 / 1+1 IDU configurations
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-7

PS1 PS2

(optional)

USER1

USER2
E3

V-LAN Q-LAN F
ALM
IDU-CABLE
(optional)

IDU-CABLE
WST

V-BUS
Power supply BUS
Control BUS Signal BUS
TRIButary
(TRIB)
Section
System
CONTROLLER
(CONTROL)
Section
Base-Band
no. 1
(BB1)
Section
Base-Band
no. 2
(BB1)
Section
(Optional)
IDUs Interfaces
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-8
Fig. 4.4 IDU physical interfaces ( ETH IDU)
Power supply BUS Control BUS Signal BUS
TRIButary
(TRIB)
Section
System
CONTROLLER
(CONTROL)
Section
Base-Band
no. 1
(BB1)
Section
Base-Band
no. 2
(BB1)
Section
IDUs Interfaces
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-9
Fig. 4.5 Network supervision
"SRAL XD"
NE
NE
SITE "A"
V-LAN
interfaces
SITE "B"
"R" channel
Line
Terminal
"D"
interface
SITE "C"
V-LAN
Interfaces
"D" interface
SITE "D"
"F" interface
"R" interface
SITE "E"
TMN OSS
"Q-LAN" interface
Cable
Connection
Q-LAN interfaces
"R" interface
"R" channel
"SRAL XD"
"SRAL XD"
NE
"SRAL XD"
NE
"SRAL XD"
NE
"SRAL XD"
NE
"SRAL XD"
NE
"SRAL XD"
NE
Line
Terminal
"SRAL XD"
NE
SRA L
NE
F
interface
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
4-10
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-1
5 CONFIGURATIONS
5.1 16xE1 IDU
The equipment configuration can be:
(*) Configurations not available for 1xE3 capacity and 4xLAN + 8xE1 capacity.
The single terminal configuration 1+0 needs only one 16xE1 BB unit and the corresponding
ODU.
All the other configurations need two 16xE1 BB units and two corresponding ODUs.
The 1+1 H/S configuration is realised with one antenna (see Fig. 5.3).
The A/D-RPT configuration allows up to a 100% of the add/drop capacity up to 8x2 Mbit/s and
up to 50% of the add-drop capacity for 162 Mbit/s.
5.2 32xE1 IDU
ODU.
G single terminal 1+0: see Fig. 5.1
G dual terminal 2(1+0) (*): see Fig. 5.2
G terminal with Hot-standby protection 1+1 H/S: see Fig. 5.3
G terminal with frequency-diversity or polarization-diversity protection
(with one or two antennas) 1+1 FD/PD: see Fig. 5.4. The Figure
shows the 1+1/PD
configuration only.
G repeater with tributary Add/Drop A/D-RPT(*): see Fig. 5.5
G terminal with frequency-diversity or polarization-diversity protection (with one or
G two antennas) 1+1 FD/PD: see Fig. 5.8. The Figure shows
the 1+1/PD configuration only.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-2
5.3 1xE3 IDU
ODU.
5.4 ETH IDU ( 4xLAN + 8xE1)
ODU.
5.5 Licence fee
The actually available configurations depend on the enabled licence fee.
The individual licence fee configuration data of any system is stored and retrieved from a dedi-
cated memory key to be inserted in the IDU.
"Payload Type", "System Type" and "Channel Spacing" parameters are subjected to licence
fee.
G terminal with frequency-diversity or polarization-diversity
protection (with one or two antennas) 1+1 FD/PD: see Fig. 5.11. The Figure
shows the 1+1/PD
configuration only.
G terminal with frequency-diversity or polarization-diversity protection (with one or
G two antennas) 1+1 FD/PD: see Fig. 5.14. The Figure shows
the 1+1/PD configuration only.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-3
5.6 Configuration summary
The next table shows all the configurations and system types.
(*) The traffic capacity of the 2x(1+0) is up to 8xE1.
(**) The overall on air capacity is shared between E1 and Ethernet traffic according to the
configuration parameters.
Tab. 5.1 Configuration summary
2
x
E
1
4
x
E
1
8
x
E
1
1
6
x
E
1
3
2
x
E
1
1
x
E
3
4
x
E
T
H
1
+
0
1
+
1

H
S
B
Y
1
+
1

F
D
2
x
(
1
+
0
)
(
*
)
A
D

R
e
p
N
o
r
m
a
l

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
H
i
g
h

D
e
n
s
i
t
y
H
D
e
I
D
U

P
l
u
g
-
i
n
Not protected
Terminal E1 (16xE1)

Protected
Terminal E1 (16xE1)

Not protected
Terminal E1 (32xE1)

Protected
Terminal E1 (32xE1)

Not protected
Terminal E3

Protected
Terminal E3

Not protected
Terminal ETH (**)

Protected
Terminal ETH (**)

IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-4
Fig. 5.1 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+0 configuration
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
TRIB.
16xE1
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s (E1)
ALARM
INT.
CONTROLLER
INT. F
ODU IDU
INT. V INT. Q INT.
V-BUS
(*)
(**)
USER
CHANNEL
(**) This interface can be used for External EOW connection
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-5
Fig. 5.2 SRAL XD equipment: dual terminal 2(1+0) configuration
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#1
TRIB.
16xE1
USER
CHANNEL
CH1
(**)
ALARM
INT.
CONTROLLER
INT. F
CABLE
INT.
BB
#2
ODU IDU
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
ODU
INT. V INT. Q
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s
E1
USER
CHANNEL
CH2
(**)
INT.
V-BUS
(*)
(**) These interfaces can be used for External EOW connection
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-6
Fig. 5.3 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+1 H/S configuration (one antenna)
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#1
TRIB.
16xE1
CONTROLLER
INT. V
INT. F
ODU IDU
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#2
ODU
USER
CHANNEL
USER CHANNEL CH1 (**)
INT. Q
ALARM
INT.
INT. V-BUS(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-7
Fig. 5.4 SRAL XD equipment: single terminal 1+1 PD configuration (one antenna)
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#1
TRIB.
16xE1
ODU IDU
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#2
ODU
USER
CHANNEL
USER CHANNEL CH.1 (**)
ALARM
INT.
CONTROLLER
INT. V
INT. F
INT. Q
INT. V-BUS(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-8
Fig. 5.5 SRAL XD equipment: Repeater with tributary Add/Drop (A/D-RPT)
configuration
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#1 TRIB.
16xE1
INT. F
CABLE
INT.
BB
#2
ODU IDU
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
ODU
USER
CHANNEL
CH1
(**)
ALARM
INT.
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s E1
CONTROLLER
INT. V INT. Q INT.
V-BUS
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-9
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
TRIB.
32xE1
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s (E1)
USER
CHANNEL
ALARM
INT.
CONTROLLER
INT. F
ODU IDU
INT. V INT. Q INT.
V-BUS
(*) This interface can be used for
External EOW connection
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-10
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#1
TRIB.
32xE1
CONTROLLER
INT. V
INT. F
ODU IDU
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#2
ODU
USER
CHANNEL
USER CHANNEL CH1
INT. Q
ALARM
INT.
INT. V-BUS
(*) This interface can be used for External EOW connection
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-11
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#1
TRIB.
32xE1
ODU IDU
TRIB.
2 Mbit/s
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
#2
ODU
USER
CHANNEL
USER CHANNEL CH.1
ALARM
INT.
CONTROLLER
INT. V
INT. F
INT. Q
INT. V-BUS
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-12
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
INT.
CABLE
INT.
BB
TRIB.
1xE3
TRIB.
34 Mbit/s (E3)
USER
CHANNEL
(*)
INT.
ALARM
INT. F
ODU IDU
INT. Q
2 Mbit/s (WST)
CABLE
CONTROLLER
INT. V INT.
V-BUS

IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-13
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
INT.
BB
#1
TRIB.
1xE3
CONTROLLER INT. V
INT. F
ODU IDU
TRIB.
34 Mbit/s
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
BB
#2
ODU
CH1 USER
CHANNEL (*)
INT. Q
INT.
ALARM
2 Mb/s WST
WST
CABLE
INT.
CABLE
CHANNEL
USER
CHANNEL
INT.
CABLE
INT.
CABLE
INT. V-BUS
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-14
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
BB
#1
ODU IDU
TRIB.
34 Mbit/s
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
BB
#2
ODU
TRIB.
1xE3
WST
INT.
CONTROLLER
CH1 USER
CHANNEL (*)
INT.
ALARM
2 Mb/s WST
CABLE
INT.
CABLE
CHANNEL
USER
CHANNEL
INT.
CABLE
INT.
CABLE
INT. V
INT. F
INT. Q
INT. V-BUS
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-15
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
16x2
BB
DATA INTERFACE UNIT
ETH LAN Port
10/100 baseT
USER
CHANNEL
ALARM
INT.
CONTROLLER
INT. F
ODU IDU
INT. V INT. Q INT.
V-BUS
4
8
E1 Tributary
E1
cross-
connection
E1 Ports
Filtering
VLAN tagging
Forwarding
E1
Framer/deframer
&
mapper/
demapper
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-16
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
#1
CONTROLLER
INT. V
INT. F
ODU IDU
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
#2
ODU
USER
CHANNEL
USER CHANNEL CH1
INT. Q
ALARM
INT.
INT. V-BUS
DATA
INTERFACE
UNIT
ETH LAN Port
10/100 baseT
4
8
E1 Tributary
E1
cross-
connection
E1 Ports
E1
Framer/deframer
& mapper/
demapper
16x2
BB
16x2
BB
Filtering
VLAN tagging
Forwarding
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-17
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
16x2
BB
#1
ODU IDU
Rx
Tx
DEM
MOD
Cable
INT.
CABLE
INT.
#2
ODU
USER CHANNEL CH.1
CONTROLLER
INT. V
INT. F
INT. Q
INT. V-BUS
USER
CHANNEL
ALARM
INT.
DATA
INTERFACE
UNIT
4
8
E1 Tributary
E1
cross-
connection
E1 Ports
E1
Framer/deframer
& mapper/
demapper
16x2
BB
ETH LAN Port
10/100 baseT
Filtering
VLAN tagging
Forwarding
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
5-18
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-1
6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6.1 IDU ARCHITECTURE
6.1.1 IDU (16xE1)
Fig. 6.1 reports the block diagram of the IDU.
The basic version (1+0) of the IDU consists of:
G a 16xE1 Tributary unit (75 Ohm unbal. or 120 Ohm bal.), that represents the physical ac-
cess of the equipment for the 2 Mbit/s (E1) Tributary streams of the public network
G a Controller unit that includes all the control and supervisory functions.
G a BB 16xE1 (162 Mbit/s) unit, that includes all the base band processing, cable protection
and IDU-ODU auxiliary service channel management
The 16xE1 Tributary unit also includes all the alarm and remote commands interfacing to/from
the remote terminal.
All the other configurations of the IDU (2(1+0), A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, PD and H/S) are obtained
by duplicating only the BB 16xE1 unit.
The IDU is provided with an EEPROM memory fitted on the Controller unit and of a KEY to
insert onto the Tributary unit containing all the configuration parameters.
6.2 2 Mbit/s (16xE1) Tributary Unit
The 16x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (16xE1) consists of 2 sub-units connected together through a
flat cable.
With regard to the 16xE1 tributary unit 75 ohm (coax) the following are the sub-units:
G common unit
G E1 interface unit (75 ohm)
With regard to the 16xE1tributary unit 120 ohm the following are the sub-units:
G common unit
G E1 interface unit E1 (120 ohm)
The unit carries out the following functions:
G impedance matching of the 2 Mbit/s I/O tributaries
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-2
G input tributary branching towards the two BB units should the equipment have been set to
the protected configuration.
The unit therefore consists of all the circuitry required to produce a non-Hitless switching
between the two aggregate signals when the equipment has been set to the protected
configuration. In this manner the BB 16xE1 card is protected against failure.
G Cross-connection at 2 Mbit/s (E1) level
In this manner each 2 Mbit/s E1 port accessing the unit can be switched over to any
2 Mbit/s E1 port exiting the unit situated on the remote terminal.
The "Cross-connector" functional block consists of a matrix through which it is possible to:
G connect several 2 Mbit/s streams (inputting the 16xE1 Tributary unit) to both of the 16xE1
Base Band units;
G let several 2 Mbit/s streams transit from one 16xE1 Base Band card over to another.
In this manner the "Drop-Insert" function has been realised; therefore the cited matrix shall be
implemented in the manner described should the equipment be configured as 2(1+0) Add-Drop
Repeater.
G Service channels interfacing (USER/Dext)
G Management of the system alarms and of the remote control signals
The front panel of the 16xE1 Tributary unit is provided with a power supply switch for the
switching ON and OFF of the whole SRAL XD equipment.
6.3 BB (16xE1) Unit
G regenerate the 2 Mbit/s input tributary signals in compliance with Rec. G.703 and
HDB3 -> NRZ convert the associated code
G monitor the incoming 2 Mbit/s streams
G generation of the aggregate frame and multiplexing of the input tributary signals into one
51.84 Mbit/s stream
G scrambler and aggregate signal encoding
G generation of a 128 kbit/s auxiliary service channel for the transmission of data channels,
alarms etc., between the IDU and the ODU that will be inserted into the 51.84 Mbit/s
stream
G generation of the switching command for the Tx non hitless switch situated on the BB
16xE1 unit should the equipment be set to the protected configuration.
G automatic level control on the signal incoming from the ODU.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-3
The unit also comprises of:
G all the circuitry necessary to carry out the hitless switching function between the two ag-
gregate signals when the equipment has been set to the protected configuration.
G all the circuitry necessary to realise the "Line driver" function in order to send and receive
the following signals from the ODU via only 1 coaxial cable:
G 51.84 Mbit/s stream
G power supply voltage for the ODU
The unit also contains the DC/DC converters for its own power supply.
6.4 Controller unit
The Controller unit implements a system controller, that is capable of managing all the system
configurations. The main functions are:
G collection of alarms and working parameters from the system units (IDU and ODU); trans-
mission of this information to a local PC and to a network supervision system
G activation of system commands coming from a local PC or from a network supervision sys-
tem (status forcing, modification of equipment parameters, etc.)
G storage on a Memory key of the system configurations and on EEPROMs the inventory /
user data and alarms history.
G routing of messages among controllers and the network supervision system manager
G electrical and protocol translation between the radio environment (which uses a proprietary
protocol channel, embedded in the radio frame, to transport management information) and
the supervision system (which requests that this information is available on a public con-
nector, with a standard protocol).
6.5 IDU (32xE1)
G a 32xE1 Tributary unit (75 Ohm unbal. or 120 Ohm bal.), that represents the physical ac-
cess of the equipment for the 2 Mbit/s (E1) Tributary streams of the public network
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-4
All the other configurations of the IDU ((1+1) FD, PD and H/S) are obtained by duplicating only
the BB 32xE1 unit.
6.5.1 2 Mbit/s (32xE1) Tributary Unit
G 32xE1 external tributary interfaces (public interface) are available on the 32xE1 board front
panel. They carry 32xE1 tributary signals. E1 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703 re-
commendation. The impedance is both 120 ohm and 75 ohm, with a unique hardware ver-
sion using four mini RJ21 connectors. The different impedances are provided via different
cabling on the same connector. Each E1 uses six pins (three for Tx signals and 3 for Rx
signals: in each direction a pin is used for both impedances and the other two pins are mu-
tually exclusive).
G Physical interface management, which is in charge of auxiliary channels (User/D exter-
nal/Alarms) interfacing. Concerning 32xE1 management, a clock recovery function of input
tributaries is available. Each tributary can be enabled or disabled. When a tributary is
disabled, an AIS signal is transmitted at output port. When a tributary is enabled, hardware
provides fault monitoring associated to each tributary, including AIS IN, LOS, Code error
and AIS OUT detection. An interface towards the control section for configuration setting
and alarm reporting are provided. For test and maintenance purposes, local loopback are
available on each tributary signal, to verify interface and cabling integrity. Lightening pro-
tection is provided. For test and maintenance, Access Board allows local and remote loop-
back for each tributary signal.
G Cross connect function allows to cross-connect up to 32xE1 signals. Each local E1 input
port can be switched to any E1 tributary output port, at the other side of the link. Cross con-
nect E1 configuration is set by using of suitable software commands, issued via LCT or
EMS.
G E1 tributary path protection is used only in Ring system type and it allows selecting the E1
signal between the two received signals according to the proper selection criteria. Only in
(1+1) system types, E1 HW protection criteria is used to select the whole set of extracted
E1 signals between the E1 signals received from the first or the second baseband unit.
Both path and HW protection use the same selector block, but with different selector logic
criteria. Path protection uses AIS criteria; HW protection uses only Baseband HW failure
criteria, and it forces all E1 switches to select signals coming from the same Baseband
board.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-5
G A Stuffing/ destuffing mechanism is present for each tributary signal, in order to multiplex
them into an aggregate signal.
G Multiplexing of 32xE1 tributary signals (after the stuffing block) into an aggregate frame al-
lows backplane connection. De-multiplexing of the same signals implemented in the oppo-
site direction on the aggregate received from BaseBand boards.The overall functionalities
associated to the access board are described in the following picture.
G Some other Auxiliary functions are available. A SEEP (i.e a Serial EEPROM) for remote
inventory (PID) is provided to record Factory Inventory data, and user data associated to
Access board. This board holds the memory key receptacle, in order to allow memory key
insertion and usage, and provide communication between Memory key interface and con-
troller. Parallel Alarm connector allows collecting local Station alarms, to provide Remote
Station controls and to provide summarized alarms associated to the local Radio Unit. In-
terfacing toward the controller board, using internal communication channels. A mechani-
cal ON/OFF locking lever switch for power supply control is provided.
6.5.2 BB (32xE1) Unit
G A part of "Baseband" management. BaseBand board multiplexes net payload, service
channel (64 kbit/s channel) and a TMN channel in order to build up the digital radio frame
(aggregate signal) to be transmitted through the radio link. De-multiplexing of the same si-
gnals, in Rx side. The radio frame is completely generated by Baseband. The multiplexed
signal is FEC coded (Tx side) and Decoded (Rx side) for error correction purposes. FEC
analysis of received signal is supported to allow hitless switch in protected system types
and a proper CRC code is used for performance monitoring of the radio link. Signal is then
Interleaved (Tx side) and de-interleaved (Rx side). Finally signal is scrambled (Tx side) to
allow better RF spectrum shaping and de-scrambled (Rx side). FEC, Interleaver and
Scrambler blocks can be enabled or disabled (by-passed) through a proper configuration
setting.
G Baseband board supports Protection logic and switch controls, in order to manage protec-
ted 'System Types'. In particular for FD system types, a Hitless protection mechanism has
been implemented, with delay compensation between the two RF channels. Compensati-
on circuitry can compensate delays up to 16 bit (static portion) plus 16 bit (dynamic porti-
on). Finally interfacing toward the control section for configuration setting and alarm repor-
ting is required. The output of the Baseband management is the radio frame, i.e. the
aggregate frame transmitted on the radio interface. The overall functionalities associated
to baseband board processing are described in the following picture.
G "Cable interface" management : IDU-ODU interface. The 32xE1 BB supports only the
155.520 Mbit/s interface.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-6
G "Power supply" block is in charge of equipment interfacing to external power supply (surge
protection, EMI filtering), equipment internal power lines conditioning (soft-start, etc.) and
-48 V power distribution to DC/DC converters and towards ODU. Tertiary sources genera-
tion and tertiary sources' distribution (unit power sources) is foreseen. A battery redundan-
cy scheme is provided. "Power supply" block provides IDU-ODU cable interface conditio-
ning including Power supply signal switch off when short circuit or open circuit is detected.
Detection and management of alarms related to equipment power supply system and in-
terfacing toward the control section for alarm collection is provided.
6.5.3 Controller unit
6.6 IDU (1xE3)
G a 1xE3 Tributary unit (75 Ohm unbal.), that represents the physical access of the equip-
ment for the 34 Mbit/s (E3) Tributary streams of the public network
IDU-ODU and 2Mbit/s WST and auxiliary service channel management
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-7
All the other configurations of the IDU ( (1+1) FD, PD and H/S) are obtained by duplicating only
the BB 1xE3 unit.
6.6.1 34 Mbit/s (1xE3) Tributary Unit + 2 Mbit/s WST
The 34 Mbit/s Tributary unit (1xE3) consists of 2 sub-units connected together through a flat
cable.
With regard to the 1xE3 tributary unit 75 ohm (coax) the following are the sub-units:
G common unit
G E3 interface unit (75 ohm)
G impedance matching of the 34 Mbit/s I/O tributary and the 2 Mbit/s I/O signal.
G input tributary and 2 Mbit/s WST signal branching towards the two BB units should the
equipment have been set to the protected configuration.
The unit therefore consists of all the circuitry required to produce a non-Hitless switching
between the two aggregate signals when the equipment has been set to the protected
configuration. In this manner the BB 1xE3 card is protected against failure.
The front panel of the 1xE3 Tributary unit is provided with a power supply switch for the
6.6.2 BB (1xE3) Unit
G regenerate the 34 Mbit/s input tributary signal in compliance with Rec. G.703 and HDB3 ->
NRZ convert the associated code
G generation of the aggregate frame into one 51.84 Mbit/s stream
stream
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-8
G generation of the switching command for the Tx non hitless switch situated on the BB 1xE3
unit should the equipment be set to the protected configuration.
6.7 Controller unit
6.8 IDU (ETH)
G a Data Interface Unit, that represents the physical access of the equipment for 4 LAN
PORTS (10/100 BaseT) and 8x2 Mbit/s (E1) Tributary streams of the public network
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-9
All the other configurations of the IDU (1+1) FD/PD and H/S) are obtained by duplicating only
the BB 16xE1 unit.
6.8.1 4xLAN (10/100BaseT) + 8x2 Mbit/s (8xE1) Tributary Unit (DATA
INTERFACE UNIT)
The Data Interface Unit (or Ethernet tributary unit) carries out the following functions:
G up to 8 E1-ports (2 Mbit/s I/O signal).
G up to 4 Ethernet 10/100 baseT Half/Full duplex.
The front panel of the Ethernet Tributary unit is provided with a power supply switch for the
6.8.1.1 Data interface unit description
A block diagram of the Data Interface Unit is shown in Fig. 6.7.
A) LAN ports and Trunk port
LAN Port Configuration
The following configurations are available for each one of the four LAN ports:
G Enabling to enable/disable a port (enabling a LAN port means setting it in forwarding mo-
de); default values = enabled for LAN1, disabled for LAN2, LAN3 and LAN4 ports. When
the port is disabled the associated alarms are masked (i.e. forced to normal state) and the
frames received from or directed to the port are discarded.
G Auto-negotiation to enable/disable the auto-negotiation of the port Bit rate and Duplex
mode (other parameters are not subject to auto-negotiation); default value = enabled.
G Bit rate to select the bit rate between the two possible values: 10 Mbit/s and 100
Mbit/s.This configuration is available only if auto-negotiation is disabled; default = 10
Mbit/s.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-10
G Duplex mode to select the half duplex working mode or the full duplex one. This configu-
ration is available only if auto-negotiation is disabled; default = half duplex.
G Tx/Rx crossover to select the transmit/receive scheme of SRAL XD: Auto / LAN card /
Switch; default = Auto. The first option allows the LAN port to automatically configure its
transmit/receive scheme in order to proper interwork with the remote appliance connected
to it, not depending on the cable used to connect them. For troubleshooting reason it is pos-
sible to select LAN card and therefore LAN port will behave like a LAN card, thus it will
expect to be connected with a 1:1 direct cable to a Switch (or via a cross-cable to a LAN
Card). Switch setting will behave like a Switch port.
G Long cable to enable the use of a LAN cable longer than 100 m. This configuration is
meaningful only when the bit rate is equal to 10 Mbit/s; default = disabled.
Trunk Port Configuration
The Trunk port state cannot be changed (always enabled).
All the other working modes are preset according to hardware design.
B) Filtering, VLAN tagging and forwarding
Filtering
Source MAC addresses received from the different ports (Trunk and LAN) are stored, along
with the corresponding port the frame was received from. This data-base, called MAC DB in
the following, is used both for filtering and for selective forwarding purposes.
Each frame containing a destination address written in the MAC DB is filtered (discarded) if the
destination address is associated to the same port the frame entered the switch.
Also frames received from a disabled port or that should exit the switch from a disabled port
shall be discarded. Entries are stored in the MAC DB for a given time amount (aging time), then
they are deleted. Each time a frame is received, if the source MAC address matches one of the
entries, the residual survival time of that entry is reset to the configured aging time. If it doesnt
match any of the entries, it is added to the database.
A command to reset the MAC DB is available.
Aging time can be configurable in the range 16...4080 s (4080 s = 68 min), with 16 second
resolution; default value = 896 s (about 15 min).
It is possible to disable the MAC DB updating (no more entries will be added and no entries will
be deleted) in debug mode only.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-11
Forwarding modes
Ethernet frames may contain some optional fields. VLAN tag field (see Fig. 6.8) is one of these
optional fields and it may used by Ethernet bridges to selectively forward frames.
Common Ethernet frames (without additional fields) have a length included in the range
between 64 and 1518 octets. If a VLAN tag is present, maximum length rises to 1522 octets.
Ethernet frames with a length up to 1536 bytes shall be supported on LAN ports. This allows
to support some proprietary frames used by particular appliances.
Four different behaviours are foreseen for the bridge contained in the SRAL XD Data Interface
access unit.
They are briefly explained hereafter.
1. Normal bridging fully connected LAN ports
Frames are forwarded only taking into account the destination MAC address. The presence or
absence of a VLAN tag does not affect the behaviour of the bridge.
LAN ports are fully connected, i.e. frames entering the appliance from one of the LAN ports can
be transmitted on all the other ports (LAN and Trunk), without any restriction.
An uplink frame (a frame entered from a LAN port) will be:
G discarded, if filtering rule is fulfilled;
G forwarded towards one LAN port only, if the destination MAC address matches one of the
MAC addresses stored in the MAC DB and the entry port is a LAN port different from the
one stored in the MAC DB;
G forwarded towards the Trunk port only, if the destination MAC address matches one of the
MAC addresses stored in the MAC DB and the corresponding port in the MAC DB is the
Trunk port;
G flooded toward the Trunk port and all the other enabled LAN ports, if the destination MAC
address is unknown.
A downlink frame (a frame entered from the Trunk port) will be:
G discarded if filtering rule is fulfilled;
G forwarded towards one LAN port only in case the destination MAC address matches one
of the stored MAC addresses;
G flooded towards all the enabled LAN ports in other cases.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-12
2. Normal bridging isolated LAN ports
Frames are forwarded only taking into account the destination MAC address. The presence or
absence of a VLAN tag does not affect the behaviour of the bridge.
LAN ports are isolated, i.e. frames entering the appliance from one of the LAN ports can be
transmitted only towards the Trunk port and not toward one of the other LAN ports.
An uplink frame will be:
G discarded if the destination MAC address matches one of the MAC addresses contained
in the MAC DB and the corresponding port in the MAC DB is one of the LAN ports;
G forwarded toward the Trunk port in other cases.
Downlink frames are managed as in Normal bridging fully connected LAN ports mode.
3. VLAN bridging selective VLAN forwarding
Only frames containing a VLAN tag containing some VLAN ID values when entering the
appliance are allowed to pass through it.
User can configure up to 64 different VLAN identifiers and the corresponding LAN ports
belonging to each VLAN; Trunk port must always belong to all the configured VLANs (this is set
by embedded software without user configuration).
Each received frame will be discarded if:
G filtering rule is fulfilled;
G it does not contain a VLAN tag;
G it contains a VLAN ID not matching the list of VLAN IDs associated to the ingress port;
G if the destination MAC address is written in the MAC DB and the associated port does not
belong to the VLAN.
Each received frame, containing a VLAN ID matching one of the values contained in the VLAN
table, will be forwarded to:
G only one of the other ports belonging to the VLAN if the destination MAC address is written
in the MAC DB and the associated port belongs to the VLAN;
G all the other ports belonging to the VLAN if the destination MAC address is unknown.
4. VLAN bridging uplink VLAN tagging & replacing
A VLAN ID is associated to each LAN port. If a frame without a VLAN tag enters the switch from
a LAN port it undergoes a VLAN tag insertion; if a frame containing a VLAN tag enters the
switch from a LAN port it undergoes a VLAN ID replacement. Frames entering the switch from
the Trunk port must contain a VLAN tag, otherwise they will be discarded.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-13
Frames are internally forwarded according to the same rules explained for the VLAN bridging
selective VLAN forwarding mode (the aforementioned VLAN table shall be automatically filled
in with the VLAN ID values assigned to the LAN ports, this is done by embedded software).
VLAN tag is removed from Ethernet frames exiting from LAN ports, whereas frames exiting
from Trunk port keep their VLAN tag.
Using this forwarding mode on both sides of the link provides a more secure transport than the
Normal bridging isolated LAN ports mode because traffic in both directions is always
restricted to only configured ports (isolated LAN ports forwarding mode floods downlink traffic
to all ports when destination MAC address is not present in the MAC DB).
6.8.1.2 BB (16xE1) Unit
G regenerate the 2 Mbit/s input tributary signals in compliance with Rec. G.703 and HDB3 ->
NRZ convert the associated code
G monitor the incoming 2 Mbit/s streams
G generation of the aggregate frame and multiplexing of the input tributary signals into one
51.84 Mbit/s stream
stream
G generation of the switching command for the Tx non hitless switch situated on the BB
16xE1 unit should the equipment be set to the protected configuration.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-14
6.8.1.3 Controller unit
6.9 IDU composition
The plug-in IDU (P/N 732-101/61 for 16xE1/1xE3/ETH IDU; P/N 732-101/62 for 32xE1 IDU)
consists of a wired sub-rack (P/N 628-586/26), where all the plug-in units are housed.
The sub-rack is delivered with two types of brackets to allow to be secured to 19" or ETSI racks.
6.9.1 IDU 16xE1
The IDU subrack is available in 12 versions:
No. 6 versions are equipped with Controller unit P/N 634-001/73 (see Tab. 6.1 and Tab. 6.9)
G 732-101/61A - 1+0 - 16 x E1 - 75/120 ohm (Sub-D)
G 732-101/61B - 1+0 - 16 x E1 - 75 ohm (coax)
G 732-101/61N - 1+0 - 16 x E1 - 120 ohm (LEMO multicontact)
G 732-101/61C - 1+1 - 16 x E1 - 75/120 ohm (Sub-D)
G 732-101/61D - 1+1 - 16 x E1 - 75 ohm (coax)
G 732-101/61P - 1+1 - 16 x E1 - 120 ohm (LEMO multicontact)
No. 6 versions are equipped with Controller unit P/N 634-001/74 (see Tab. 6.2 and Tab. 6.9)
G 732-101/61R - 1+0 - 16 x E1 - 75/120 ohm (Sub-D)
G 732-101/61T - 1+0 - 16 x E1 - 75 ohm (coax)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-15
G 732-101/61W - 1+0 - 16 x E1 - 120 ohm (LEMO multicontact)
G 732-101/61S - 1+1 - 16 x E1 - 75/120 ohm (Sub-D)
G 732-101/61V - 1+1 - 16 x E1 - 75 ohm (coax)
G 732-101/61Z - 1+1 - 16 x E1 - 120 ohm (LEMO multicontact)
a) This unit is equipped to implement the 2x(1+0), Add/Drop Repeater and 1+1 Hot
standby/FD/PD configurations.
P/N 634-001/73 equipped)
Denomination P/N 732-101/xx
/61A
1+0
16xE1
75/120
ohm
(Sub-D)
/61B
1+0
16xE1
75 ohm
coax
/61N
1+0
16xE1
120
ohm
(LEMO)
/61C
1+1
16xE1
75/120
ohm
(Sub-D)
/61D
1+1
16xE1
75 ohm
coax
/61P
1+1
16xE1
120
ohm
(LEMO)
A Subrack 628-586/26 1 1 1 1 1 1
B1 16xE1 tributary
(Coax.)
612-404/37 - 1 - - 1 -
B2 16xE1 tributary
(Sub-D)
612-404/38 1 - - 1 - -
B3 16xE1 tributary
(LEMO)
612-404/39 - - 1 - - 1
C Controller unit 634-001/73 1 1 1 1 1 1
D 16xE1 base band 612-314/39 1 1 1 1 1 1
E
a
16xE1 base band 612-314/39 - - - 1 1 1
Cover 333-309/80 1 1 1 - - -
H Memory key with
licence fee
b 1 1 1 1 1 1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-16
b) For the available keys refer to par. 2.3.13.5 and par. 2.3.13.6 of the UMN manual.
6.9.2 IDU 1xE3
The IDU subrack is available in 2 versions (see Tab. 6.3 and Tab. 6.10):
G 732-101/61E - 1+0 - 1 x E3 - 75 ohm (coax)
G 732-101/61F - 1+1 - 1 x E3 - 75 ohm (coax)
Tab. 6.2 Plug-in 16xE1 IDU composition P/N 732-101/61 (Controller unit P/N
634-001/74 equipped)
/61R
1+0
16xE1
75/120
ohm
(Sub-D)
/61T
1+0
16xE1
75 ohm
coax
/61W
1+0
16xE1
120
ohm
(LEMO)
/61S
1+1
16xE1
75/120
ohm
(Sub-D)
/61V
1+1
16xE1
75 ohm
coax
/61Z
1+1
16xE1
120
ohm
(LEMO)
A Subrack 628-586/26 1 1 1 1 1 1
B1 16xE1 tributary (Coax.) 612-404/37 - 1 - - 1 -
B2 16xE1 tributary
(Sub-D)
612-404/38 1 - - 1 - -
B3 16xE1 tributary
(LEMO)
612-404/39 - - 1 - - 1
C Controller unit 634-001/74 1 1 1 1 1 1
D 16xE1 base band 612-314/39 1 1 1 1 1 1
E
a
16xE1 base band 612-314/39 - - - 1 1 1
Cover 333-309/80 1 1 1 - - -
H Memory key with
licence fee
b 1 1 1 1 1 1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-17
a) This unit is equipped to implement the 1+1 Hot standby/FD/PD configurations.
b) For the available keys refer to par. 2.3.13.5 and par. 2.3.13.6 of the UMN Manual.
6.9.3 IDU ETH
The IDU subrack is available in 2 versions (see Tab. 6.4 and Tab. 6.11):
G 732-101/61L - 1+0 - ETH (4 x LAN + 8xE1 coax 75 ohm)
G 732-101/61M - 1+1 - ETH (4 x LAN + 8xE1 coax 75 ohm)
Tab. 6.3 Plug-in 1xE3 IDU composition P/N 732-101/61
/61E
1+0
1xE3
75 ohm
coax
/61F
1+1
1xE3
75 ohm
coax
A Subrack 628-586/26 1 1
B 1xE3 tributary (Coax.) 612-404/40 1 1
C Controller unit 634-001/74 1 1
D 1xE3 base band 612-314/40 1 1
E
a
1xE3 base band 612-314/40 - 1
Cover 333-309/80 1 -
H Memory key with licence fee b 1 1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-18
a)This unit is equipped to implement the 1+1 Hot standby/FD/PD configurations.
b)For the available keys refer to par. 2.3.13.5 and par. 2.3.13.6.
Tab. 6.4 Plug-in ETH IDU composition P/N 732-101/61
/61L
1+0
ETH
/61M
1+1
ETH
A Subrack 628-586/26 1 1
B Ethernet tributary 612-404/41 1 1
D 16xE1 base band 612-314/39 1 1
E
a
16xE1 base band 612-314/39 - 1
Cover 333-309/80 1 -
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-19
6.10 IDU 32xE1
The IDU subrack is available in 2 versions (Refer to Tab. 6.5 and Fig. 2.68):
G 732-101/62A - 1+0 - 32xE1 - 75/120 ohm (MiniRj21)
G 732-101/62B - 1+1 - 32xE1 - 75/120 ohm (MiniRj21)
a) This unit is equipped to implement the 1+1 Hot standby/FD/PD configurations.
b) For the available keys refer to par. 2.3.13.5 and par. 2.3.13.6.
32xE1 IDU is managed starting from the SWR 3.7
Tab. 6.5 Plug-in 32xE1 IDU composition P/N 732-101/62
/62A 1+0 32xE1 /62B 1+1 32xE1
A Subrack 628-586/26 1 1
B 32xE1 tributary 612-404/65 1 1
D 32xE1 base band 612-314/62 1 1
E
a
32xE1 base band 612-314/62 - 1
Cover 333-309/80 1 -
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-20
6.11 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES
In this paragraph are reported the operations of all the control and command elements that are
present on the front panels of the units making up the equipment.
Fig. 6.13, Fig. 6.14, Fig. 6.15 and Fig. 6.17 and illustrate the front panel of the indoor assembly
showing the LEDs, the monitoring points, the connectors and the control elements.
The list and the function of the LEDs are reported in Tab. 6.6
Tab. 6.6 Summary of the front panel LEDs
Unit LED Colour Meaning
BASE BAND
Unit
ODU
Alarm
Red
General ODU alarm: lights up when an alarm is
present on the ODU.
CBL
Alarm
Yellow
CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is
lower than expected. The causes might be due to
the cable either breaking down or being
disconnected, or to absence of ODU.
Red
CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is
higher than expected. The cause might be due to
a short-circuit on the cable or on the ODU.
CH A
a, b
Green
Lights up when the Base Band signal transits in the
direct path. Refer to Fig. 6.20, Fig. 6.21, Fig. 6.22,
Fig. 6.23 for 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration
and Fig. 6.24, Fig. 6.25, Fig. 6.26, Fig. 6.27 for
1+1 Hot Standby configuration.
Yellow
Lights up when the channel concerned is used
with software forcing.
CH B
a, b
Green
Lights up when the Base Band signal transits in the
indirect path. Refer to Fig. 6.20, Fig. 6.21,
Fig. 6.22, Fig. 6.23 for 1+1 Frequency Diversity
configuration and Fig. 6.24, Fig. 6.25, Fig. 6.26,
Fig. 6.27 for 1+1 Hot Standby configuration.
Yellow
Lights up when the channel concerned is used
with software forcing.
' Red
General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm. It
lights up also when there are no internal power
supply voltages.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-21
a) a) In 1+1 configuration there are in total 4 LEDs: two LEDs (CH A and CH B) on the
BB unit 1 and two LEDs (CH A and CH B) on the BB unit 2.
Only one of the four LEDs is ON. The LED is ON on the active BB unit.
In 1+0 configuration LED CH A is always ON (green) and LED CH B is always OFF.
b) In 1+1 configuration if the BB unit is not active, both LEDs (CH A and CH B) are OFF.
In 1+1 hot standby configuration the active BB unit is connected to the active RF Trans-
mitter.
c) On the RJ-45 connector of Q-LAN and V-LAN interfaces are present two LEDs (green):
LED1 (on the left of front view) signals the receiving status and LED2 signals the con-
nection status of the interface.
CONTROLLER
c
Unit
' Red General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm. It
rights up also when there are no internal power
supply voltages.
TEST Yellow Manual operation in progress: the LED lights up
when the equipment is not operating according to
what configured, but is "forced" into an unusual
condition.
CRITICAL/
MAJOR
Red Critical/ Major alarm: if ON it denotes the
presence of a Critical/Major" alarm inside the IDU,
for which an immediate (Critical) or urgent (Major)
corrective action is required.
MINOR /
WARNING
Red Minor/ Warning alarm: if ON it denotes the
presence of a "Minor/Warning" alarm inside the
IDU, for which a corrective action is not urgently
required.
TRIBUTARIES
unit
PS OK/' Green All the power sources of the equipment are OK
(after the POWER switch has been switched "on").
The LED will be 'off' when at least one p.s. is NOK.
Red Internal general alarm of the Unit: an alarm is
active whose origin is internal to the Unit The LED
lights-on in case of missing of each internal power
source.
ETH
TRIBUTARIES
unit
Right
LAN
port
Green Data presence (ON in case of data presence), Tx
and/or Rx side
Left
LAN
port
Green Link status (ON in case of link presence).
Tab. 6.6 Summary of the front panel LEDs
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-22
6.12 ODU ARCHITECTURE
The functional block diagram of ODU is given in Fig. 6.28.
6.12.1 BB-I (Base-Band and Cable Interface) Section
The BB-I section is in charge of the following tasks:
G IDU-ODU cable base-band interface management
G ODU power supply interface management
G IDU-ODU low level signals exchange management
G The HDe ODU support both cable itnerfaces (51.84 Mbit/s and 155.520 Mbit/s)
6.12.2 Power Supply Section
The Power Supply section is in charge of the following tasks:
G ODU's interfacing to external power supply (from ODU-CABLE interface)
G Equipment's internal power lines conditioning and power distribution to third level power
supply sources.
G Detection and management of alarms related to equipment's power supply system.
6.12.3 Modem Section
In Modem section there is a modulator capable to perform the suitable Modulation.
ODU HD/HP uses a 4 QAM Modem in HP mode and a 16 TCM Modem in HD mode.
ODU ND uses a 4 CPM Modem.
ODU HDe uses a 4 QAM Modem in ND mode and a 16 TCM Modem in HD mode.
6.12.4 Controller Section
The Controller section is in charge of the following tasks:
G Monitoring of ODU alarms and configuration.
G ODU interfacing to IDU CONTROL section.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-23
6.12.5 IF section
The "Intermediate Frequency" section is responsible of the following main tasks:
G up-conversion to IF (Tx IF signal) of the input modulated signal generated by the digital mo-
dulator, and delivery of the Tx IF signal to RF section;
G down-conversion to in-phase and in-quadrature components and filtering of the IF signal
received from RF section; delivery of down converted signals to the digital demodulator;
G monitoring of the operating conditions of the IF circuits and of the integrity of the internal
interfaces, with generation of the associated alarms.
6.12.6 RF Section
The "RF" section is in charge of the following main tasks:
G up-conversion to desired RF frequency of the incoming IF (modulated) signal, output by
"IF" section;
G low-noise reception of the RF signal from far end radio transmitter;
G down-conversion to desired IF frequency of the received RF signal from far end radio trans-
mitter.
6.12.7 ODU identification
The ODU comprises a hermetic container, arranged for pole fixing, inside which RF modules
(depending of the operating range), Modem and power supply modules (common in all RF
range) are housed.
Adjustment and composition of ODU RF units depend on the working RF frequency range.
The ODU is available in HD/HP and ND versions:
G HD/HP version:
G P/N 732-241/07 : 7 GHz version (refer to par. 2.3.15.1 of the UMN Manual)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-24
G P/N 732-241/38A : 38 GHz Low Power version (refer. to par. 2.3.15 of the UMN Manu-
al)
G HDe version:
G P/N 732-241/18E : 18 GHz version (refer to par. 2.3.15.10 of the UMN Manual)
G P/N 732-241/23E : 23 GHz version (refer to par. 2.3.15.11of the UMN Manual)
G P/N 732-241/38E : 38 GHz version (refer to par. 2.3.15.12 of the UMN Manual)
G P/N 732-241/38EA: 38 GHz Low Power version (refer to par. 2.3.15.13 of the UMN
Manual)
G ND version:
The ODU identification P/N comprises two field: the first one (11 characters) is the equipment
P/N, the second one (3 characters) is the customizing encoding, concerning the RF frequency
(operating frequency band within the whole RF range).
6.12.8 Vertical polarization application
See Fig. 6.29 and Fig. 6.30.
6.12.9 Horizontal polarization application
See Fig. 6.31 and Fig. 6.32.
6.12.10 Rx field measure connector
See Fig. 6.33.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-25
Fig. 6.1 16xE1 IDU block diagram
2 Mbit/s
G.703 (E1)
1
16
SERVICE
CHANNELS
ALARM
INTERFACE
IDU
16 x E1
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
CONTROLLER
UNIT
BB 16 x E1
UNIT
UNIT
BB 16 x E1 (*)
FROM/T
O ODU
STATION
BATTERY
INT.
V
INT.
F
(PC)
INT.
Q
(*) Not present in 1+0 configuration.
INT.
V-BUS
(**)
(**) Available with the Controller unit
P/N 634-001/74 only
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-26
Fig. 6.2 Data interface unit block diagram
2 Mbit/s
G.703 (E1)
1
32
SERVICE
CHANNELS
ALARM
INTERFACE
IDU
32 x E1
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
CONTROLLER
UNIT
BB 32 x E1
UNIT
UNIT
BB32 x E1 (*)
FROM/T
O ODU
STATION
BATTERY
INT.
V
INT.
F
(PC)
INT.
Q
INT.
V-BUS
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-27
Fig. 6.3 Access Board payload block diagram

Tributaries
Selection
Logic
Tributaries
Monitoring
Tributaries
Monitoring
Clock
Recovery
32xE1
32xE1
External
interface
32xE1
Trib. Mngmt.
Fault
Monitoring
32xE1
AIS In/LOS
32xE1
Line
Decoder
Loopback
AIS Insertion
32xE1
1xE1
D embedded
extraction
D embedded
to Controller
AIS Insertion
AIS Detector
32xE1
32xE1
External
interface
Loopback
32xE1
Line
Coder
32xE1
1xE1
D embedded
Insertion D embedded
from Controller
Stuffing
Mux
Backplane
Interface
Stuffing
Mux
DeStuffing
DeMux
DeStuffing
DeMux
To
BB1
To
BB2
From
BB1
From
BB2
Dejitter
PLL
32xE1
Tributaries
Selection
Logic
Tributaries
Monitoring
Tributaries
Monitoring
Backplane
Interface
Backplane
Interface
Backplane
Interface
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-28
Fig. 6.4 BaseBand Board payload block diagram
Mux
demux
Aggregate E1
ATPC
64 Kbit/s
payload
Aux
channels
64-256
Kbit/s
(R ch)
Radio interface
(to/from Cable
function-BB board)
Hitless protection
signals (to/from BB2)
BB functionality (BB board)
FEC
PM
analysis
Scrambler/
descrambler
r

To/from
Access
board
Trail ID
management
Trail ID
Split/
Hitless
switch
Hitless
logic
Cable
frame
Phy
interf
cable
Cable frame
CRC
REI-RDI
Alarms from
modem section
interleaver /
de-
interleaver
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-29
Fig. 6.5 1xE3 IDU block diagram
INT.
V
INT.
F
(PC)
INT.
Q
34 Mbit/s
G.703 (E3)
2 Mbit/s
(WST
INT.
V-Bus
CONTROLLER
UNIT
BB 1 x E3
UNIT
UNIT
BB 1 x E3 (*)
FROM/T
O ODU
STATION
BATTERY
SERVICE
CHANNELS
ALARM
INTERFACE
IDU
1 x E3
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-30
Fig. 6.6 ETH IDU block diagram
DATA INTERFACE UNIT
8 E1
cross-
connection
E1 Ports
E1
Framer/deframer
&
mapper/
demapper
4 Filtering
VLAN tagging
Forwarding
INT.
V
INT.
F
(PC)
INT.
Q
LAN
10/100BaseT
INT.
V-Bus
CONTROLLER
UNIT
BB 16 x E1
UNIT
UNIT
BB 16 x E1 (*)
FROM/T
O ODU
STATION
BATTERY
SERVICE
CHANNELS
ALARM
INTERFACE
2 Mbit/s
G.703 (E1)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-31
Fig. 6.7 Data interface unit block diagram
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-32
Fig. 6.8 VLAN tag
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-33
Fig. 6.9 ODUs functional block diagram
ODU
ODU
CONTROLLER
Section
Power
Supply
Section
Base-Band
and cable
Interface
(BB-I)
Section
MODEM
Section
Intermediate
Frequency
(IF)
Radio
Frequency
(RF)
Duplexer
Signal BUS
Control BUS Power supply BUS
RSSI ODU-CABLE Antenna Interface
ODUs external interfaces
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-34
Fig. 6.10 Tributary protection general block diagram
TX Section 1
TX Section2 RX Section2
RX Section1
Splitter
Switch Site A Site B
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-35
Fig. 6.11 Rx general protection block diagram

A1
B2 A2
B1 Hitless Switch 1

RX switch 1

from RF
section 1

BB 1

Hitless Switch 2
BB 2
RX switch 2
from RF
section 2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-36
Fig. 6.12 (1+1) FD Tx section protection block diagram

TX Switch 1
TX Switch 2
BB 1
BB 2
C1
C2
D1
D2
RF Section 1
RF Section 2
Common
Accesses
RF TX
RF TX
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-37
Fig. 6.13 IDU front panel in (1+1 - 16xE1) configuration
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
USER/Dext USER/Dext ALMs
Tx1
Rx1 Rx5
Tx5
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 18 2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 9
I 0
I 0
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
SIEMENS
'
T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
Q- LAN V - L A N
LCT
SI EMENS
V - B U S
1
12
10
7 8
13
14 15 16 18
20 5 3
4 2
19
IDU ASSEMBLY
17
11
6
1
12
10
13
11
1
12
10
13
11
14 15 16
18
9
1 - Battery power supply switch 11 - Connector for 64 kbit/s V11 data channel connections System 1
2 - Power supply connector Base Band Unit 1 12 - Connector for 64 kbit/s V11 data channel connections System 2
3 - Power supply connector Base Band Unit 2 13 - Connector for KEY
4 - IDU/ODU connections connector System 1 14 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory Q interface
5 - IDU/ODU connections connector System 2 15 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory V interface
6 - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm coax connections connector (tributaries 1-16) 16 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the LCT link
7 - 2 Mbit/s 75/120 ohm Sub-D connections connector (tributaries 1-8) 17 - SubD 9-pin V-Bus connector
8 - 2 Mbit/s 75/120 ohm Sub-D connections connector (tributaries 9-16) 18 - Controller unit LEDs
9 - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm LEMO connections connector (tributaries 1-16) 19 - Base Band unit LEDs System 1
10 - Connector for alarm connections 20 - Base Band unit LEDs System 2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-38
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
1 - Battery power supply switch 10 - Connector for 64 kbit/s V11 data channel connections System 2
2 - Power supply connector Base Band Unit 1 11 - Connector for KEY
3 - Power supply connector Base Band Unit 2 12 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the V-BUS interface
4 - IDU/ODU connections connector System 1 13 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory Q interface
5 - IDU/ODU connections connector System 2 14 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory V interface
6 - 34 Mbit/s 75 ohm coax connections connectors 15 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the LCT link
7 - 2 Mbit/s (WST) 75 ohm coax connections connectors 16 - Controller unit LEDs
8 - Connector for alarm connections 17 - Base Band unit LEDs System 1
9 - Connector for 64 kbit/s V11 data channel connections System 1 18 - Base Band unit LEDs System 2
1
10 9
8
6 7
11
13 14
15 16
18 5 3
4
2
17
12
IDU ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-39
Fig. 6.15 IDU front panel in (1+1 - ETH ) configuration
1 10 9 8
6
7
11
15 17 19 5 3
4 2
18
12
IDU ASSEMBLY
16
1 - Battery power supply switch
2 - Power supply connector Base Band Unit 1
4 - IDU/ODU connections connector System 1
6 - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm Sub-D connections connector (tributaries 1-8)
7 - ETHERNET LAN PORTS (10/100 BaseT) RJ45 connectors
8 - Connector for alarm connections
9 - Connector for 64 kbit/s V11 data channel connections System 1
11 - Connector for KEY
12 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the V-BUS interface
13 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory Q interface
14 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory V interface
15 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the LCT link
16 - LAN ports status LEDs
17 - Controller unit LEDs
18 - Base Band unit LEDs System 1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-40
1 10 9 8
6
7
11
12 13 14 17 19 5 3
4 2
18
15
IDU ASSEMBLY
16
1 - Battery power supply switch
6 - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm Sub-D connections connector (tributaries 1-8)
7 - ETHERNET LAN PORTS (10/100 BaseT) RJ45 connectors
8 - Connector for alarm connections
11 - Connector for KEY
12 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the V-BUS interface
13 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory Q interface
14 - RJ11 connector for the supervisory V interface
15 - SubD 9-pin RS232 connector for the LCT link
16 - LAN ports status LEDs
17 - Controller unit LEDs
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-41
Fig. 6.17 Summary of the front panel LEDs
a) In 1+1 configuration there are in total 4 LEDs: two LEDs (CH A and CH B) on the BB unit 1 and two LEDs (CH A and
CH B) on the BB unit 2. Only one of the four LEDs is ON. The LED is ON on the active BB unit.
In 1+0 configuration LED CH A is always ON (green) and LED CH B is always OFF.
b) In 1+1 configuration if the BB unit is not active, both LEDs (CH A and CH B) are OFF.
In 1+1 hot standby configuration the active BB unit is connected to the active RF Transmitter.
c) On the RJ-45 connector of Q-LAN and V-LAN interfaces are present two LEDs (green): LED1 (on the left of front view)
signals the receiving status and LED2 signals the connection status of the interface.
BASE BAND
Unit
ODU
Alarm
Red General ODU alarm: lights up when an alarm is present on the ODU.
CBL
Alarm
Yellow CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is lower than expected. The
causes might be due to the cable either breaking down or being
disconnected, or to absence of ODU.
Red CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is higher than expected. The
cause might be due to a short-circuit on the cable or on the ODU.
CH A
a, b
Green Lights up when the Base Band signal transits in the direct path. Refer to
Fig. 6.20, Fig. 6.21, Fig. 6.22, Fig. 6.23 for 1+1 Frequency Diversity
configuration and Fig. 6.24, Fig. 6.25, Fig. 6.26, Fig. 6.27 for 1+1 Hot Standby
configuration.
Yellow Lights up when the channel concerned is used with software forcing.
CH B
a, b
Green Lights up when the Base Band signal transits in the indirect path. Refer to
Fig. 6.20, Fig. 6.21, Fig. 6.22, Fig. 6.23 for 1+1 Frequency Diversity
configuration and Fig. 6.24, Fig. 6.25, Fig. 6.26, Fig. 6.27 for 1+1 Hot Standby
configuration.
Yellow Lights up when the channel concerned is used with software forcing.
' Red General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm. It lights up also when there
are no internal power supply voltages.
CONTROLLER
c
Unit
' Red General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm. It rights up also when there
are no internal power supply voltages.
TEST Yellow Manual operation in progress: the LED lights up when the equipment is not
operating according to what configured, but is "forced" into an unusual
condition.
CRITICAL/
MAJOR
Red Critical/ Major alarm: if ON it denotes the presence of a Critical/Major"
alarm inside the IDU, for which an immediate (Critical) or urgent (Major)
corrective action is required.
MINOR /
WARNING
Red Minor/ Warning alarm: if ON it denotes the presence of a "Minor/Warning"
alarm inside the IDU, for which a corrective action is not urgently required.
TRIBUTARIES
unit
PS OK/' Green All the power sources of the equipment are OK (after the POWER switch has
been switched "on"). The LED will be 'off' when at least one p.s. is NOK.
Red Internal general alarm of the Unit: an alarm is active whose origin is internal to
the Unit The LED lights-on in case of missing of each internal power source.
ETH
TRIBUTARIES
unit
Right
LAN
port
Green Data presence (ON in case of data presence), Tx and/or Rx side
Left
LAN
port
Green Link status (ON in case of link presence).
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-42
Fig. 6.18 Base Band unit front panel
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D
'
PS
J
C
/
M
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U
'
1
st
Base Band unit
2
nd
Base Band unit
IDU ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-43
Fig. 6.19 Controller unit front panel
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
'
T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
I 0
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
SIEMENS
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
'
T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
I 0
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
SIEMENS
V-BUS
Controller unit
P/N 634-001/73
Controller unit
P/N 634-001/74
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-44
Fig. 6.20 1+1 FD: position of the switches and CH A and CH B LEDs switching on

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 ON
CH A
OFF
CH B
BB #2 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-45

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 OFF
CH A
ON
CH B
BB #2 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-46

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B
BB #2 ON
CH A
OFF
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX
Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-47

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B
BB #2 OFF
CH A
ON
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-48
Fig. 6.24 1+1 Hot Standby: position of the switches and CH A and CH B LEDs switching
on

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD
Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 ON
CH A
OFF
CH B
BB #2 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
Fixed
Fixed
CL
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-49
on

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD
Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 OFF
CH A
ON
CH B
BB #2 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
Fixed
Fixed
CL
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-50
on

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD
Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B
BB #2 ON
CH A
OFF
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
Fixed
Fixed
CL
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-51
on

ODU 1

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 1

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD
Trib.
RF TX
EPS Tx
ODU 2

Services
Insert

MUX
Scrambler
FEC Enc
Interleaver

BB# 2

Cable

Interf.

Cable
Interf./
MOD

RF TX
EPS Tx
IDU
BB #1 OFF
CH A
OFF
CH B
BB #2 OFF
CH A
ON
CH B

(from ODU 1)

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.

Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Hitless
Switch
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
IDU
BB# 1
EPS Rx
BB# 2
(from ODU 2)

Cable
Interf.

De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Trib.
EPS Rx
Tx side
Rx side
Fixed
Fixed
CL
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-52
Fig. 6.28 ODUs functional block diagram
ODU
ODU
CONTROLLER
Section
Power
Supply
Section
Base-Band
and cable
Interface
(BB-I)
Section
MODEM
Section
Intermediate
Frequency
(IF)
Section
Radio
Frequency
(RF)
Section
Duplexer
Signal BUS Control BUS
Power supply BUS
RSSI ODU-CABLE
Antenna Interface
ODUs external interfaces
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-53
Fig. 6.29 Vertical polarization application (ODU Normal Density - ND and ODU
High Density enhanced HDe)
Note = for vertical polarised application, the IN/OUT cable connector is at bottom.
REAR VIEW
IN/OUT cable
connector
Rx field measure
connector
Ground
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-54
Fig. 6.30 Vertical polarization application (ODU High Density - HD)
Note = for vertical polarised application, the IN/OUT cable connector is at bottom.
REAR VIEW
IN/OUT cable
connector
Rx field measure
connector
Ground
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-55
Fig. 6.31 Horizontal polarization application (ODU Normal Density - ND and ODU
High Density enhanced - HDe)
Note = for horizontal polarised application, the IN/OUT cable connector is on the right side.
REAR VIEW
Rx field measure
connector
IN/OUT cable
connector
Ground
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-56
Fig. 6.32 Horizontal polarization application (ODU High Density - HD)
Note = for horizontal polarised application, the IN/OUT cable connector is on the right side.
REAR VIEW
IN/OUT cable
connector
Rx field measure
connector
Ground
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-57
Fig. 6.33 Rx field measure connector
Rx field measure
connector
BNC socket
(*)
(*) This Rx field measure connector is the test point for the connection of a voltmeter
during the antenna alignment procedure.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
6-58
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-1
7 PROTECTION SYSTEM
ARCHITECTURE
The system protection in 1+1 configuration can be split in two functional blocks:
G tributary section
G service channels section
7.1 Tributary Protection
The Fig. 7.1 shows the tributary protections general block diagram.
Two protection modes have been realized:
G Hardware protection: that performs the system protection from hardware failures (e.g. pa-
rameters degradation or failure of electronic devices, connection lines interruptions etc.).
This mode can't avoid errors burst during the protection because it is a hardware swit-
ching controlled throughout the rising of alarms connected to failures that, in the instants
preceding the switching, brought the equipment to operate in strongly deteriorated condi-
tions (LOS, LOF etc.).
G Hitless protection: that performs the system protection from selective and temporary link
quality degradation e.g. the propagation fadings. This mode, based on memory buffers that
guarantee the bit to bit alignment, can operate an errors free protection when fadings less
of 100 dB/sec occur.
The protection modes of SRAL XD System follow these main rules:
G Each HW failure happening in Tx chain (IDU + ODU) is protected actuating the available
hardware switches as per the chosen Frequency Diversity or Hot Standby mode.
G Each HW failure happening in Rx chain (ODU + IDU), upstream the 'switch hitless', is pro-
tected actuating the hitless switch (in this case the hitless switch works like a hardware
switch i.e. it does not perform the error free protection).
G Each HW failure happening in Rx chain of IDU, downstream the hitless switch, is protec-
ted actuating the available hardware switches".
G In case of 1+1 Frequency Diversity protection, the degradation of the 'active' radio channel
is protected actuating the hitless switch which, in this case, can perform the error free
protection if the degradation is caused by a selective fading not faster than 100 dB/sec.
The protection rules above detailed produce the enabling/disabling of the HW alarms compo-
sing the summarized hardware alarm used by each one of the protection logics.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-2
Note that:
G When the protection system actuates the hardware switches, both the chains, Tx (IDU +
ODU) and Rx (ODU + IDU), are switched at the same time for the following reasons:
G any failure of the active transmission chain
G failure of the active Rx chain downstream the switch hitless
G CARD FAIL of the active BB 16xE1 unit or 1xE3 unit
G extraction of the active BB 16xE1 unit or 1xE3 unit
G LINK ID CODE error, detected via Sw, on the active BB unit
G The operating mode of the protection system minimizes the number of Tx hardware swit-
chings, in the case of Rx chain failure of the relevant transmission active ODU, and there-
fore reduces the events of tributary traffic loss in the opposite direction to which the Rx fai-
lure has happened.
7.2 Rx tributary Protection
The tributary protection diagram (see Fig. 7.2) concerning Rx section:
G the hitless switch position inside the Band Base unit. A and B blocks summarize generic
hardware functions, explained later.
G the Rx switches, sited inside the Common Accesses unit, are controlled by a command
which comes from the protection logic (detailed in the following).
The hitless switches receive the 16xE1, ETH or 1xE3 tributary at both inputs. The switching is
operated by the logic circuitry described later. It is based on the detected alarms: the hitless
switches protect against alarm of the RF section and 'A' sub-units; the final switches only pro-
tect against hardware failures.
7.2.1 Tx tributary Protection
Two different modes of Tx protection architecture, due to the equipment system type, are avai-
lable:
G 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration
G 1+1 Hot Standby configuration
Note: The following symbols are used:
G PRF: RF power value of the signal outgoing from antenna;
G P1: power value set via SW for the main ODU;
G P2: power value set via SW for the secondary ODU;
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-3
G Pmin, Pmax: Minimum and maximum allowed power values.
Mode a): 1+1 Frequency Diversity configuration
The Fig. 7.3 shows a tributary protection diagram concerning the Tx section.
Note that transmission switches send the same aggregate signal to the RF sections.
This configuration has not a priority unit. When alarms occur the system switches from a unit
to the other and the new working unit keeps on working even after alarms or failures have been
resolved (unrevertive mode).
Mode b): 1+1 Hot-Standby configuration without RF switches (one antenna).
In this configuration secondary ODU is only coupled with the main ODU with a coupler CL as
shown in the Fig. 7.4. The direct unit is priority and it is preferably chosen when no alarms or
equivalent alarms occur (revertive mode) but it is also possible the unrevertive mode throug-
hout the presetting set by LCT or by the remote management system.
The main ODU can be squelched if hardware failure conditions occur in the Tx chain. The
squelch commands are controlled via SW depending on the status of command generated by
Tx protection logic but can also locally generated in the ODU if the communication channel bet-
ween IDU and ODU is not working.
The controller manages the Tx Power value of main and standby channels in order to guaran-
tee a (C/I)min.
In Hot-Standby (1+1) configuration when an alarm occurs the system switches from main unit
to the secondary. Before switching the power transmitter fail alarm (Tx_PWR_ALM) is latched.
Two cases are possible:
1. If Tx_PWR_ALM is active system behaves in unrevertive mode, that is: the secondary unit
keeps on working until the operator forces manually the main unit (after the failure has been
resolved).
2. If the active alarm is not Tx_PWR_ALM, the secondary unit keeps on working until the
alarms of main unit is active. When alarms expires the system automatically switches again
to the main unit
7.2.2 Protection Structures
The various protection architectures are realized as shown in Fig. 7.5 (Tx section, Hot Standby
configuration), Fig. 7.6 (Tx section, Frequency Diversity configuration) and Fig. 7.7 (Rx sec-
tion).
The figures also show the switching commands listed below:
G HW SW CMD generated by hardware (Tx/Rx) protection logic housed in the BB unit;
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-4
G RF SW CMD generated by hardware (Tx) protection logic housed in the BB unit and ma-
naged in the ODU;
G HL SW CMD generated by hitless Rx protection logic.
The switching commands shown in the figures above are generated by the protection logics,
which are implemented on both BB units. These logics use the following inputs:
G alarms and status signals coming from radio units.
G presetting set by local operator interface (PC) or by the remote management system.
The operation of the switch, actuated via software, allows the forcing of the active radio channel
at the receiver side, regardless of the status of alarms and external commands. This switch
overrides hitless protection logic.
When the power supply of a card containing a switch fails, the switch automatically goes in a
disabled status, in order to avoid interference with the signal passing through the other way.
7.2.3 Hardware protection logic
This logic, shown in Fig. 7.8, protects the system from hardware failures of IDUs and ODUs.
The hardware protection logic allows the transmission to the antenna of the signal coming from
the unit with no alarm (Tx side protection) and the transmission to public connectors of the tri-
butary coming from the unit with no alarm (Rx side protection).
The hardware protection logic, split in Tx section and in Rx section, generates the following
commands:
G HW SW CMD that controls Tx and Rx switches at the same time;
G RF SW CMD in case of Hot Standby configuration.
In Hot-Standby configuration, the switch command RF SW CMD is generated on both the BB
units and sent to the correspondent ODU through the communication channel between IDU
and ODU, managed by the BB unit.
HW SW CMD is not used for Tx switches but only for Rx switches.
In Frequency Diversity configuration, the ODU ignores the RF SW CMD and only HW SW CMD
is used.
In all cases, when the communication channel is not working or is disconnected, the correspon-
dent ODU guarantees an open switch to avoid unwilling conditions. The open switch status is
automatically maintained also during the power-up time.
Fig. 7.8 shows the alarms used by hardware protection logic.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-5
When working automatically, the switching logic on IDU generates the switch command using
the following signals:
G A summarized Tx local failure alarm (local Tx HW ALM): this alarm is set for failures on the
Tx Section of BB unit and ODU of the radio controlled by the local protection logic.
G A summarized Tx remote failure alarm (remote Tx HW ALM): this alarm is set for failures
on the Tx Section of BB unit and ODU of the radio not controlled by the local protection
logic.
G A summarized Rx local failure alarm (local Rx HW ALM): this alarm is set for failures on
the Rx Section of ODU and BB unit.
G A summarized Rx remote failure alarm (remote Rx HW ALM): this alarm is set for failures
on the Rx Section of ODU and BB unit.
G A local system status signal (local HW SW CMD): this signal comes from the local system
switching logic and it is necessary to avoid useless switching in Frequency Diversity confi-
guration.
G A remote system status signal (remote HW SW CMD): this signal comes from the remote
system switching logic and it is necessary to avoid useless switching in Frequency Diver-
sity configuration.
G A priority signal: this signal is based on the physical place held by the BB unit (identified by
a "Slot Sense" pin) and defined the priority level of the unit in case of conflicts.
The automatic protection logic is overridden by the following settings from local operator inter-
face (PC) or from remote supervision system:
G HW FM1: service forced for BB #1 unit
G HW FM2: service forced for BB #2 unit
The "Slot Sense" signal identifies the physical position of the BB unit and sets a priority criterion
when both cards have no alarm or when forced status conflict each other.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-6
7.2.4 Hitless protection logic
This logic protects the system from link quality degradation.
The hitless protection logic generates the HL SW CMD command in consequence of the alarms
of the local radio channel and the remote radio channel that the hitless protection logic, on both
the BB units, receives as inputs.
Fig. 7.10 goes in detail about the structure of the hitless switch protection logic and Fig. 7.9
shows where the alarms, used by the logic and below listed, arise.
G Loc ODU Alm a summarized failure alarm coming from the correspondent ODU
unit. This alarm is sent through the communication channel
between IDU and ODU and managed by the switching logic
housed in the local BB unit.
G Loc DEM Alm a summarized failure alarm coming from the local IF-DEM
section. This alarm is sent through the communication channel
between IDU and ODU and managed by the switching logic
housed in the local BB unit.
G Loc HL Alm a summarized failure alarm coming from the local Rx hitless
section.
G Loc H-EW a High Early Warning alarm coming from the local FEC.
G Loc L-EW a Low Early Warning alarm coming from the local FEC.
G Rem HIGH Alm a summarized failure alarm coming from the remote system. This
alarm is the sum of the remote ODU, DEM and HL alarms.
G Rem H-EW a High Early Warning alarm coming from the remote FEC.
G Rem L-EW a Low Early Warning alarm coming from the remote FEC.
All these alarms are divided in three categories: all the up mentioned alarms except H-EW and
L-EW belong to the more serious category (HIGH Alm). The protection logic allows the passa-
ge of the less serious alarmed channel, when no signal is forced.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-7
Fig. 7.1 Tributary protection general block diagram
TX Section 1
TX Section2 RX Section2
RX Section1
Splitter
Switch Site A Site B
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-8
Fig. 7.2 Rx general protection block diagram

A1
B2 A2
B1 Hitless Switch 1

RX switch 1

from RF
section 1

BB 1

Hitless Switch 2
BB 2
RX switch 2
from RF
section 2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-9
Fig. 7.3 (1+1) FD Tx section protection block diagram

TX Switch 1
TX Switch 2
BB 1
BB 2
C1
C2
D1
D2
RF Section 1
RF Section 2
Common
Accesses
RF TX
RF TX
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-10
Fig. 7.4 (1+1) HS Tx section protection block diagram

TX Switch 1 (fixed)
TX Switch 2 (fixed)
TX Section 1
TX Section 2
C1
C2
D1
D2
RF TX
RF TX
RF Section 1
RF Section 2
RF pwr managm.
& Squelch
CL
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-11
Fig. 7.5 Tx protection in Hot-Standby configuration with one antenna

RF TX
ODU 1
Scrambler
Services
Insert
MUX FEC Enc
BB# 1

(1+1 ) config.
IDU
HW SW CMD 2 (fixed)
Interleaver
BB# 2
Cable
Interf.
Scrambler
Services
Insert
MUX FEC Enc
Interleaver
Cable
Inte rf.
CL

RF SW CMD 2
HW SW CMD 1

(fixed)
RF SW CMD 1
HW Control
Logic
Cable
Interf./
MOD
HW Control
Logic
ODU 2
RF TX
Cable
Interf./
MOD TRIBUTARY
16 x E1/1xE3
CL = Coupling Loss priority line standby line
16xE1/32xE1
ETH/1xE3
Tributary
(1+1) config
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-12
Fig. 7.6 Tx protection in Frequency Diversity configuration (with two antennas)

ODU 1
TRIBUTARY
16 x E1/1xE3

(1+1 ) config.
IDU
HW SW CMD 2
BB# 2
Scr ambler
Services
Insert
MUX FEC Enc
Interleaver
Cable
Interf.
ODU 2
RF TX
RF SW CMD 2
(fixed)
RF TX
HW SW CMD 1 RF SW CMD 1
(fixed) HW Control
Logic
HW Control
Logic
Scrambler
Services
Insert
MUX FEC Enc
BB# 1
Interleaver
Cable
Interf.
CableII
Interf./
MOD
Cable
Interf./
MOD
16xE1/32xE1
ETH/1xE3
Tributary
(1+1) config
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-13
Fig. 7.7 Rx Protection

IDU
BB# 2
(from ODU 1)
(from ODU 2)
HWSWCMD1

TRIBUTARY
16 x E1/1xE3

(1+1) config

Services
Drop
DEMUX

Cable
Interf.
BB# 1

Hitless
Switch
HL SWCMD1
HL Control
Logic
HW Control
Logic
HL SWCMD2
HL Control
Logic
Services
Drop
DEMUX
Cable
Interf.
HWSWCMD2
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Hitless
Switch
HW Control
Logic
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
16xE1/32xE1
ETH/1xE3
Tributary
(1+1) config
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-14
Fig. 7.8 Alarms of Hardware protection logic
Scrambler
MUX
FEC Enc
BB Tx section
Interleaver
Cable
Interf.
ODU
RF TX
MOD
DEMUX
HW SW CMD
De-Interleaver
FEC decoder
De-Scrambler
Hitless
Switch
f rom / to other BB
To / from other BB
to other BB
from other BB
ODU TX Alim.
I/F Alm
MIR Alm TX OVRF Alm
TX MS Alm
RX OVRF Alm
HW SW CMD
RF SW CMD
16xE1/1xE3
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
BB Rx section
Cable
Interf.
I/F Alm
ODU RX Alim.
DEM
RF RX
16xE1/32xE1
ETH/1xE3
Tributary
(1+1) config
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-15
Fig. 7.9 Hardware protection logic architecture

BB#1
loc HW ALM
HW SW CMD 1

Local HW FM

Sense
BB#2
loc HW ALM
HW SW CMD 2

local HW FM
Slot
Sense Slot
HW
Switch
Logic
HW
Switch
Logic
loc HW SW CMD
rem HW ALM
remote HW FM
rem HW SW CMD
rem HW ALM
remote HW FM
loc HWSW CMD
rem HW SW CMD
HOT-STBY-CMD
HOT-STBY-CMD
RF SW CMD 2
RF SW CMD 1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-16
Fig. 7.10 Alarms of Hitless protection logic
RF RX
ODU
DEM
ODU RX ALM

DEMUX
DeInterleaver
FEC decoder
Descrambler
Cable
Interf.
Hitless
Switch
Services
Drop
From / to remote BB
IDU
BB
I/F ALM HLALM H-EW L-EW
HL-SW CMD
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-17
Fig. 7.11 Hitless Protection Logic Architecture

BB#1
ODU1Alm
HL SW CMD
DEM1 Alm
L-EW-1
H-EW-1
HITLESS
Switch
Logic
HL1

HIGH1
Alm
FM1
+
HITLESS
Switch
Logic
HL SW CMD
+
H-EW-2
L-EW-2
ODU2Alm
DEM2 Alm
HL2

FM1
HIGH2
Alm
BB#2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
7-18
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-1
8 SERVICE CHANNELS
MANAGEMENT AND
PROTECTION
The radio service channels are:
G USR 64 kbit/s, V.11, synchronous co-directional or contra-directional
channel, reserved for the user and available on a public
connector of Accesses unit.
G R 64 kbit/s synchronous contra-directional embedded channel,
reserved to transmit radio network supervision messages.
G D 64 kbit/s, synchronous contra-directional channel, reserved to
transmit radio supervision messages, using a time slot of the
2 Mbit/s tributary. The channel is managed throughout the
Controller unit in mixed radio/cable links. The Qtcp protocol is
used.
G Dext 64 kbit/s, V.11, synchronous contra-directional channel,
managed by the Controller unit, in alternative to the 2Mbit/s
embedded D channel, to connect different equipment (e.g.
SDH) to the TMN supervision center. In this case the Qtcp
protocol is also used. The channel, available on a public
connector of Accesses unit, doesn't have protection.
Service channels are controlled throughout the functional blocks identified as "Services Insert"
and "Services Drop" as shown in the following figures.
In (1+1) Hot-Standby configurations, the same tributary is transmitted on both aggregated radio
channels. Service channel protection thus follows the same rule of the tributary.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-2
8.1 User channel (USR)
They are made up of the following signals:
The Fig. 8.1, Fig. 8.2 and Fig. 8.3 show the logical structures the allow the management of the
USER channels in the various configurations.
8.1.1 Radio Embedded Communication Channel (R)
The R channels are managed throughout the Services Drop/Insert functional blocks of Base
Band unit and they are directly connected to the Controller unit.
In the 1+1 configuration, the status of HW SW CMD commands determine which of the two
channels is active whereas the CONFIG signal, setting by local operator interface (PC), carries
the active channel towards the SCC1 port of the Controller unit .
In the other configurations, the CONFIG signal enables the passage of both channels, available
in consideration of the fixed ON status of HW SW CMD commands, to the relevant SCC ports
of Controller unit.
Tab. 8.1 User channel
Signal type USR CH1
signal name
USR CH2
signal name
User Data Tx: differential data input in the radio system,
coming from the public connector
U-DTx1 a-b U-DTx2 a-b
User Contra-Directional Clock Tx: differential clock for data
input in the radio system (coming from the radio system)
U-CKTx1-
OUT a-b
U-CKTx2-
OUT a-b
User Co-Directional Clock Tx: differential clock for data in-
put in the radio system (coming from the public connector)
U-CKTx1-IN
a-b
U-CKTx2-IN
a-b
User Data Rx: differential data output from the radio sys-
tem
U-DRx1 a-b U-DRx2 a-b
User Clock Rx: differential clock for data output in the radio
system (coming from the radio system)
U-CKRx1 a-b U-CKRx2 a-b
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-3
8.1.2 Tributary Embedded Communication Channel (D)
The D channels are connected to Controller via Accesses unit.
In the 1+1 configuration, the status of HW SW CMD commands determine which of the two
channels is active whereas the CONFIG signal, setting by local operator interface (PC), carries
the active channel towards the HDLC1 port of the Controller unit (see Fig. 8.6).
In this case the second HDLC port of the Controller is available for the Dext channel.
In the other configurations, the CONFIG signal enables the passage of both channels, available
in consideration of the fixed ON status of HW SW CMD commands, to the relevant HDLC ports
of Controller unit (see Fig. 8.7).
If the embedded D channels are disable (separately setting by local operator interface (PC) or
by the remote management system) the HDLC ports are available for two Dext channels.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-4
Fig. 8.1 1+1 configuration of User channels

Services
Drop
HW SW CMD 1
USR CH1
Services
Insert
U - CKTX - IN 1
U - CKTX - OUT 1
U - DRX 1
U - CKRX 1
HW SW CMD 1
Services
Drop
HW SW CMD 2
USR CH2 Services
Insert
U - DTX 2
U - CKTX - OUT 2
U - DRX 2
U - CKRX 2
HW SW CMD 2
16xE1/1xE3
TRIBUTARY
UNIT

U - DTX 1
U - CKTX - IN 2
CONFIG
CONTROLLER
IDU
BB #1
BB #2
16xE1/32xE1
ETH/1xE3
Tributary
(1+1) config
(*)
(*) This interface can be used also for the optional External EOW connection.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-5
Fig. 8.2 2x(1+0) configuration of User channels

Services
Drop
fixed
USR CH1
Services
Insert
U-CKTX-IN 1
U-CKTX-OUT 1
U-DRX 1
U-CKRX 1
fixed
Services
Drop
fixed
USR CH2 Services
Insert
U-DTX 2
U-CKTX-OUT 2
U-DRX 2
U-CKRX 2
fixed

U-DTX 1
U-CKTX-IN 2
CONFIG
CONTROLLER
IDU
BB #1
BB #2
16xE1
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
(*)(**)
(*) 1st (V11) connection
(**)2nd (V11) connection
(*)(***)
16xE1
Tributary
(2+0) config
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-6
Fig. 8.3 Repeater configuration of User channel

Services
Drop
fixed
USR CH1
Services
Insert
U-CKTX-IN 1
U-CKTX-OUT 1
U-DRX 1
U-CKRX 1
fixed
Services
Drop
USR CH2 Services
Insert
U-DTX 2
U-CKTX-OUT 2
U-DRX 2
U-CKRX 2

U-DTX 1
U-CKTX-IN 2
CONFIG
CONTROLLER
IDU
BB #1
BB #2
fixed
fixed
16xE1
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
(*)
16xE1
Tributary
(Repeater) config
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-7
Fig. 8.4 1+1 configuration of R channels

CONFIG
Controller
Services
Drop
BB #1
Services
Insert
Serial
CKTX-1
HW SW CMD 1
DTX-1
HW SW CMD 1
D & CK RX-1
Services
Drop
Services
Insert
CKTX-2
HW SW CMD 2
DTX-2
HW SW CMD 2
D & CK RX-2
Comm
Contr
CH 1
Serial
Comm
Contr
CH 2
(not used)
BB #2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-8
Fig. 8.5 2x(1+0) configuration of R channels

CONFIG
Controller
Services
Drop
BB #1
Services
Insert
Serial
CKTX-1
fixed
DTX-1
D & CK RX -1
Services
Drop
Services
Insert
CKTX-2
DTX-2
D & CK RX -2
Comm
Contr
CH 1
Serial
Comm
Contr
CH 2
BB #2
fixed
fixed
fixed
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-9
Fig. 8.6 1+1 configuration of D channels

CONFIG
Controller
Services
Drop
BB #1
Services
Insert
CKTX - 1
HW SW CMD 1
DTX - 1
HW SW CMD 1
D & CK RX - 1
Services
Drop
Services
Insert
C KTX - 2
HW SW CMD 2
DTX - 2
HW SW CMD 2
D & CK RX - 2
(available
for Dext)
BB #2
H.level
Data
Link
Control
2
H.level
Data
Link
Control
1
16xE1/1xE3
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
8-10
Fig. 8.7 2x(1+0) configuration of D channels

CONFIG
Controller
Services
Drop
BB #1
Services
Insert
CKTX-1
DTX-1
D & CK RX -1
Services
Drop
Services
Insert
CKTX-2
fixed
DTX-2
D & CK RX -2
BB #2
16xE1
TRIBUTARY
UNIT
fixed
fixed
fixed
H.level
Data
Link
Control
1
H.level
Data
Link
Control
2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-1
9 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
All the connectors used for the external connections are easily accessible from the front side
of the indoor assembly.
All the cables from/to the outside are brought down from the cabinet top inside the side wall
slots or, in the case the wiring is running under the raised floor, they are made to ascend like-
wise.
9.1 16xE1 IDU
9.1.1 Primary supply voltage connection
The outdoor assembly (ODU) is remotely power supplied by the indoor IDU (P/N 732-101/61)
by means of 1 coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration).
The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the delivered
-48 V voltage.
The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 3-poles male
connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 9.1.
9.1.2 Connector functions
Fig. 9.2 to Fig. 9.16 show the positions and functions of the connectors.
9.2 1xE3 IDU
-48 V voltage.
Fig. 9.18 to Fig. 9.28 show the position and functions of the connectors.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-2
9.3 ETH IDU
-48 V voltage.
Fig. 9.30 to Fig. 9.41 show the position and functions of the connectors.
9.4 32xE1 IDU
The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the delivered -48
V voltage.
32xE1 IDU is managed starting from the SVR 3.7
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-3
Fig. 9.1 16xE1 IDU - Primary Power Supply Connections
O D U C AB LE
C AU T IO N
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
P S
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
S RAL X D s
Q -LA N V -LA N
LC T
P S
C AU T IO N
Vbattery
O D U C AB LE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
A3
A1
2 M bit/s I/O T R IB U T A R IE S 9-1 6 2 M bit/s I/O T R IB U T A R IE S 1 -8
A LM s U S E R /D ext U S E R /D ext I 0
V -B US
STOTZ
4A
PS (pi n A3)
PS (pi n A3)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Female connector
(422-060/61)
(*)
Female contact
(422-027/31)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/82)
(*)
2x1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded
cable for power supply
CRIMPING
SIDE VIEW
A1 = Positive
A3 = Negative
Nominal voltage
-48 Vdc + 20%
(-38.4 to 57.6 Vdc)
STATION
Main negative
power supply
1
st
Base Band
2
nd
Base Band
ND 7...38 GHz
1+0 40 W
1+1 75 W
HD/HP 7...38 GHz
1+0 45 W (38 GHz) 60 (7GHz)
1+1 80 W (38 GHz) 115 (7GHz)
MAXIMUM POWER CONSUMPTION
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-4
Fig. 9.2 16xE1 IDU - ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA)
O D U C AB LE
C AU T IO N
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
P S
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
S RAL X D
s
Q -LA N V -LA N
LC T
P S
C AU T IO N
Vbattery
O D U C AB LE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
2 M bit/s I/O T R IB U T A R IE S 9-1 6 2 M bit/s I/O T R IB U T A R IE S 1 -8
A LM s U S E R /D ext U S E R /D ext I 0
V -B US
ODU 1
ODU 2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-5
Fig. 9.3 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 18
ALMs
USER/Dext USER/Dext I 0
V -B U S
10
12
13
29
28
11
9
27
26
25
24
8
Channel
no. 6
23
7
6
22
5
21
4
3
20
19
18
2
1
14
16
17
15
33
32
31
30
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
42
43
41
40
38
39
37
36
34
35
Channel
no. 5
Channel
no. 8
Channel
no. 7
Channel
no. 2
Channel
no. 1
Channel
no. 4
Channel
no. 3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
2 Mbit/s I/O Tributaries 1-8
Tributary cable
8xE1 120 ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(314-331/79..82)
(a)(b)(c)
(a) = This prewiring cable is a standard solution; on request is possible to order the single materials
and to make the cable in field.
(b) = This material is supplied with the installation materials.
(c) = The length for this cable is 200 m max.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-6
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
ALMs
V -B U S
10
12
13
29
28
11
9
27
26
25
24
8
Channel
no. 14
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
23
7
6
22
5
21
4
3
20
19
18
2
1
14
16
17
15
33
32
31
30
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
42
43
41
40
38
39
37
36
34
35
Channel
no. 13
Channel
no. 16
Channel
no. 15
Channel
no. 10
Channel
no. 9
Channel
no. 12
Channel
no. 11
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Tributary cable
8xE1 120 ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(314-331/79..82)
(a)(b)(c)
(a) = This prewiring cable is a standard solution; on request is possible to order the single materials and to
make the cable in field.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-7
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
ALMs
V -B U S
10
12
13
29
28
11
9
27
26
25
24
8
23
7
6
22
5
21
4
3
20
19
18
2
1
14
16
17
15
33
32
31
30
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
42
43
41
40
38
39
37
36
34
35
Rx-GND (to be connected
to shell cable-clamp)
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 6
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 5
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 8
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 7
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 2
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 1
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 4
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Chanell
no. 3
Rx DATA
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Tributary cable
8xE1 75 ohm (L=5/
10/20/30 m)
(314-331/35..38)
(a)(b)(c)
(a) = This prewiring cable is a standard solution; on request is possible to order the single materials and
to make the cable in field.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-8
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
ALMs
V -B U S
10
12
13
29
28
11
9
27
26
25
24
8
23
7
6
22
5
21
4
3
20
19
18
2
1
14
16
17
15
33
32
31
30
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
42
43
41
40
38
39
37
36
34
35
Channel
no. 14
Channel
no. 13
Channel
no. 16
Channel
no. 15
Channel
no. 10
Channel
no. 9
Channel
no. 12
Channel
no. 11
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Rx DATA
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Tributary cable
8xE1 75 ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(314-331/35..38)
(a)(b)(c)
(a) = This prewiring cable is a standard solution; on request is possible to order the single materials and
to make the cable in field.
(c) = The lenght for this cable is 300 m max.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-9
Fig. 9.7 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s (75 ohm coax.) from 1 to 16 Tributary Connections
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx1
Rx1 Rx5
Tx5
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
I 0
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
Rx1
Tx1 Tx5
Rx5
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
V -B US
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Self-locking coaxial plug
1.0/2.3 - 75 ohm
(421-015/60)
(*)
(*) The self-locking coaxial plugs are included in the coaxial kit P/N 332-055/47.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-10
Fig. 9.8 16xE1 IDU - 2 Mbit/s (120 ohm LEMO) from 1 to 16 Tributary Connections
V -B US
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
3
4
1
2
1 Rx b
2 Rx a
3 Tx a
4 Tx b
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-11
Fig. 9.9 16xE1 IDU - Alarm connections
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx1
Rx1 Rx5
Tx5
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
I 0
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
ALMs
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
8
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT2
ODU
CRITICAL
WARNING
TEST
IDU
ALIM OFF
6
15
14
7
13
12
5
11
4
3
10
9
2
1
MINOR OR
MAJOR
CEN-IN4
CEN-IN3
V -B US
(*) Materials included in the alarm accessories kit P/N 332-055/49A.
Pin Alarm Description
1 ALIM OFF No power supply alarm
9 TEST Abnormal condition (i.e. Tributary loop active)
2 IDU IDU alarm
10 MINOR OR WARNING Minor or Warning alarm
3 CRITICAL Critical alarm
11 ODU ODU alarm
4 MAJOR Major alarm
12 CEN-OUT2 Station alarm output #2 (from remote station)
14 CEN-IN2 Station alarm input #2 (to remote station)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
15 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/86)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/92)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-12
Fig. 9.10 16xE1 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext (USER 1)
USER/Dext
Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Tx5
Rx5
I 0 USER/Dext
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
USER/Dext
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
ODU CABLE
ODU CABLE
SRAL XD
LCT
J W T
N
M T
E
S ' / M
C
/
B
C
B
B L A
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
H
C
A
H
H
H
B
C
L
U
D
O
U
D
'
'
PS
PS
V -B US
USER/Dext
Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Tx5
Rx5
I 0 USER/Dext
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
USER/Dext
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
ODU CABLE
ODU CABLE
SRAL XD
LCT
J W T
N
M T
E
S ' / M
C
/
B
C
B
B L A
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
H
C
A
H
H
H
B
C
L
U
D
O
U
D
'
'
PS
PS
V -B US
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
(*) These accessories are included in the installation kit P/N 332-055/29A.
In case should be used External EOW, use this connector for
1+0 / 1+1 / A/D and 2+0 IDU configurations
CONFIGURATION
1+0
2x(1+0)
Add/Drop Repeater
1+1
USER 1
USER/Dext SRA L Comp.
Dext
Dext
Dext
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-13
Fig. 9.11 16xE1 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext (USER 2)
USER/Dext
Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Tx5
Rx5
I 0 USER/Dext
Tx9
Rx9
Tx13
Rx13
USER/Dext
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
ODU CABLE
ODU CABLE
SRAL XD
LCT
J W T
N
M T
E
S ' / M
C
/
B
C
B
B L A
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
H
C
A
H
H
H
B
C
L
U
D
O
U
D
'
'
PS
PS
V -B US
In case should be used External EOW, use this connector for
2+0 IDU configuration only
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
(*)
USER 2
Dext
Dext
Dext
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
2x(1+0)
Add/Drop Repeater
1+1
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-14
Fig. 9.12 16xE1 IDU - (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connnection
DATA Tx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
GND
CO-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a)
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a) (b)
USER (a) (b)
DATA Rx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
GND
Dext (a)
Dext SRA L
compatible (a)
Dext (a)
WIRING CABLE for
CONNECTION BETWEEN CHANNELS
Dext-Dext SRA L compatible
2 1
7 6
1 2
6 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
a) Configuration of User (Co/Contra-directional Clock) or Dext/Dext SRA L
compatible channels is a software controlled operation.
b) If External EOW should be used, the configuration of User is:
Contra-directional Clock.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-15
Fig. 9.13 16xE1 IDU - Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN)
With the Controller unit P/N 634-001/74, this interface is not available
shoud the V-BUS interface be used.

Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Rx5
Tx5
USER/Dext
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
USER/Dext I 0
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
SRAL XD
LCT
S
E
' T
T
/
M /
N
W J
M C
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
ODUCABLE
H
A
H
B
H
A
C C
B
H
D B
L U '
L
B
C
D
U
O
'
PS
PS
V-LAN Q-LAN

V - B U S

Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Rx5
Tx5
USER/Dext
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
USER/Dext I 0
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
SRAL XD
LCT
S
E
' T
T
/
M /
N
W J
M C
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
ODUCABLE
H
A
H
B
H
A
C C
B
H
D B
L U '
L
B
C
D
U
O
'
PS
PS
V-LAN Q-LAN

(10/100 BASE T) (10 BASE T)
VLAN QLAN
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire a
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
1
INDOOR ASSEMBLY WITH
CONTROLLER UNIT P/N 634-001/73
INDOOR ASSEMBLY WITH
CONTROLLER UNIT P/N 634-001/74
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-16
Fig. 9.14 16xE1 IDU - Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN)

10 11
SRAL XD-1
10 11
SRAL XD-2
10 11
SRAL XD-n
A
B

B
10 11
10 11
10 11
HUB
B
B
B
B
B
A
SRAL XD-n
SRAL XD-2
SRAL XD-1
EXAMPLE B EXAMPLE A
To LAN
To LAN X
To LAN Y
To LAN Z
KEY: 10 = Q LAN; 11 = V LAN
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-17
Fig. 9.15 16xE1 IDU - V-BUS Connection ( with Controller P/N 634-001/74)
V-BUS
1
6
5
6
2 M bit/s I/O TR IB U TA R IE S 916
U SE R /D ext A LM s
2 M bit/s I/O TR IB U TAR IE S 18
U SER /D ext I 0
s
Q -LA N V -LA N
SR A L X D
LC T
'
T
T
E
S
M
W
N
/
C A U TIO N
O D U C A BLE
C
J
M
/
V battery
C A U TIO N
V battery
O D U C A BLE
A
H
B
H
L
B
U
D '
C
A
H H
B
C C
B
L
O
U
D '
PS
PS
V-BU S
V-BUS
(128 Kb/s DATA Channel)
6
7
8
9
5
4
3
1
2
V-DRX-a
V-DRX-b
not used
V-D-a
V-D-b
not used
not used
not used
not used
Ful l Dupl ex
Hal f Dupl ex
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
P/N 634-001/74 Controller unit
The V-bus interconnection on for the Controller unit is carried out by means of 120
ohm twisted-pair cable (max. length 300 m). The V-bus cable must be correctly
terminated by two 120 Ohm terminations, mounted at the two ends of the cable.
Should be used the V-BUS interface, the V-LAN interface cannot be used.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-18
Fig. 9.16 16xE1 IDU - LCT connection (RS 232)

PERSONAL
COMPUTER
LCT
Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Rx5
Tx5
USER/Dext
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
USER/Dext I 0
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
SRAL XD
LCT
S
E
' T
T
/
M /
N
W J
M C
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
ODU CABLE
H
A
H
B
H
A
C C
B
H
D B
L U '
L
B
C
D
U
O
'
PS
PS
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
LCT connector (RS 232)
Pin Signal I/O Description
1 F_CD I Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier Detect)
2 F_RxD I Received Data
3 F_TxD O Transmit Data
4 F_DTR O Data Terminal Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 F_DSR I Data Set Ready
7 F_RTS O Request To Send
8 F_CTS Clear To Send
9 n.c. Ring Indicator
The LCT connector (F interface) can be used also to connect
a SRAL XD to extend a SRAL network.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-19
Fig. 9.17 1xE3 IDU - Primary Power Supply Connections
A3
A1
STOTZ
4A
PS (pin A3)
PS (pin A3)
O D U C AB L E
C A U T IO N
V battery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D
'
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
S R AL XD s
Q -LA N V -LA N
LC T D ext U S E R /Dext ALM s I 0
PS
C A U T IO N
V battery
O D U C AB L E
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V -BU S 34M bit/s 2M bit/s
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Female connector
(422-060/16)
(*)
Female contact
(422-027/31)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/82)
(*)
2x1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded
CRIMPING
SIDE VIEW
A1 = Positive
A3 = Negative
Nominal voltage
-48 Vdc + 20%
(-38.4 to 57.6 Vdc)
STATION
Main negative
power supply
1
st
Base Band
2
nd
Base Band
ND 7...38 GHz
1+0 40 W
1+1 75 W
HD/HP 7...38 GHz
1+0 45 W (38 GHz) 60 (7GHz)
1+1 80 W (38 GHz) 115 (7GHz)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-20
Fig. 9.18 1xE3 IDU - ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA)
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
ODU 1
ODU 2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-21
Fig. 9.19 1xE3 IDU - 34 Mbit/s tributary connections (75 ohm coax.)
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
Tx Rx
V-BUS
Rx
34Mb/s
Tx Rx
2Mb/s WST
TRIBUTARIO
34 Mbit/s (E3)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
1.0/2.3 - 75 ohm
(421-015/60)
34 Mbit/s (E3)
TRIBUTARY
(*)
75 Ohm coaxial cable
TCE 2HH2 1(0.4-1.9)/M1
(104-102/21)
(**) (***)
(*) The Self-locking coaxial plugs are supplied in the coax connections kit P/N: 332-055/55.
(**) This material is supplied with the installation materials.
(** ) The length of this cable is 150 m max.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-22
Fig. 9.20 1xE3 IDU - 2 Mbit/s WST Signal connections (75 ohm coax.)
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
Tx Rx
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
Segnale
2 Mbit/s (WST)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
2 Mbit/s (WST)
SIGNAL
(*)
(**) (***)
1.0/2.3 - 75 ohm
(421-015/60)
75 Ohm coaxial cable
TCE 2HH2 1(0.4-1.9)/M1
(104-102/21)
(*) The Shelf-locking coaxial plugs are supplied in the coax connections kit P/N 332-055/55
(**) This material is supplied with the installation materials.
(***) The length of this cable is 150 m max.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-23
Fig. 9.21 1xE3 IDU - Alarm connections
ALMs
8
6
15
14
7
13
12
5
11
4
3
10
9
2
1
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT2
ODU
CRITICAL
WARNING
TEST
IDU
ALIM OFF
MINOR OR
MAJOR
CEN-IN4
CEN-IN3
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
15 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/86)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/92)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
Alarm meaning
2 IDU IDU alarm
10 MINOR OR
WARNING
Minor or Warning alarm
11 ODU ODU alarm
4 MAJOR Major alarm
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-24
Fig. 9.22 1xE3 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext (USER 1)
USER/Dext
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
USER 1
Dext
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
(*) These accessories are included in the installation kit P/N 332-055/29A
In case should be used External EOW, use this connector
for 1+0/1+1 IDU configurations
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-25
Fig. 9.23 1xE3 IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext (USER 2)
USER/Dext
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
USER 2
Dext
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-26
Fig. 9.24 1xE3 IDU - (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connection
DATA Tx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
GND
CO-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a)
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a) (b)
USER (a) (b)
DATA Rx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
GND
Dext (a)
Dext SRA L
compatible (a)
Dext (a)
WIRING CABLE for
2 1
7 6
1 2
6 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
a) Configuration of User (Co/Contra-directional Clock) or Dext/Dext SRA L compatible
channels is a software controlled operation.
b) If External EOW should be used, the configuration of User is: Contra-directional Clock.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-27
Fig. 9.25 1xE3 IDU - Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN)

Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Rx5
Tx5
USER/Dext
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
USER/Dext I 0
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
SRAL XD
LCT
S
E
' T
T
/
M /
N
W J
M C
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
ODU CABLE
H
A
H
B
H
A
C C
B
H
D B
L U '
L
B
C
D
U
O
'
PS
PS
V-LAN Q-LAN
(10/100 BASE T) (10 BASE T)
VLAN QLAN
V - B U S
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire a
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
1
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
In the 1xE3 IDU this interface is not available should the V-BUS
interface be used.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-28
Fig. 9.26 1xE3 IDU - Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN)

10 11
SRAL XD-1
10 11
SRAL XD-2
10 11
SRAL XD-n
A
B

B
10 11
10 11
10 11
HUB
B
B
B
B
B
A
SRAL XD-n
SRAL XD-2
SRAL XD-1
EXAMPLE B EXAMPLE A
To LAN
To LAN X
To LAN Y
To LAN Z
kEY: 10 = Q LAN; 11 = V LAN
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-29
Fig. 9.27 1xE3 IDU - V-BUS Connection
V-BUS
1
6
5
6
U SER /D ext I 0
s
Q -LA N V -LA N
SR A L X D
LC T
'
T
T
E
S
M
W
N
/
C A U TIO N
O D U C A BLE
C
J
M
/
V battery
C A U TIO N
V battery
O D U C A BLE
A
H
B
H
L
B
U
D '
C
A
H H
B
C C
B
L
O
U
D
'
PS
PS
V-BU S
V-BUS
6
7
8
9
5
4
3
1
2
V-DRX-a
V-DRX-b
not used
V-D-a
V-D-b
not used
not used
not used
not used
Ful l Dupl ex
Hal f Dupl ex
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
The V-bus interconnection on for the Controller unit is carried out by
means of 120 ohm twisted-pair cable (max. length 300 m). The V-bus
cable must be correctly terminated by two 120 Ohm terminations,
mounted at the two ends of the cable.
Should be used the V-BUS interface, the V-LAN interface cannot be
used.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-30
Fig. 9.28 1xE3 IDU - LCT connection (RS 232)
P E R S O N A L
C O M P U T E R
LCT
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRALXD s
Q- LAN V- LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V- BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
The LCT connector (F interface) can be used also to connect a SRAL
XD to extend a SRAL network.
5 GND Signal Ground
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-31
Fig. 9.29 ETH IDU - Primary Power Supply Connections
A 3
A 1
STOTZ
4A
PS (pin A3)
PS (pin A3)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Female connector
(422-060/16)
(*)
Female contact
(422-027/31)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/82)
(*)
2x1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded
CRIMPING
SIDE VIEW
A1 = Positive
A3 = Negative
Nominal voltage
-48 Vdc + 20%
(-38.4 to 57.6 Vdc)
STATION
Main negative
power supply 1
st
Base Band
2
nd
Base Band
ND 7...38 GHz
1+0 40 W
1+1 75 W
HD/HP 7...38 GHz
1+0 45 W (38 GHz) 60 (7GHz)
1+1 80 W (38 GHz) 115 (7GHz)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-32
Fig. 9.30 ETH IDU - ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA)
ODU 1
ODU 2
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-33
Fig. 9.31 ETH IDU - 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections
10
12
13
29
28
11
9
27
26
25
24
8
23
7
6
22
5
21
4
3
20
19
18
2
1
14
16
17
15
33
32
31
30
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
42
43
41
40
38
39
37
36
34
35
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 6
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 5
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 8
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 7
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 2
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 1
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 4
Rx DATA
Tx DATA
Channel
no. 3
Rx DATA
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Tributary cable
8xE1 75 ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(314-331/35..38)
(a)(b)(c
(a) = This prewiring cable is a standard solution; on request is possible to order the single ma-
terials and to make the cable in field.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-34
Fig. 9.32 ETH IDU - 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm (Sub-D) from 1 to 8 Tributary Connections
1 0
1 2
1 3
29
28
1 1
9
27
26
25
24
8
Channel
no. 6
23
7
6
22
5
21
4
3
20
1 9
1 8
2
1
1 4
1 6
1 7
1 5
33
32
31
30
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
42
43
41
40
38
39
37
36
34
35
Channel
no. 5
Channel
no. 8
Channel
no. 7
Channel
no. 2
Channel
no. 1
Channel
no. 4
Channel
no. 3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
DATA Tx Wi re a
DATA Tx Wi re b
DATA Rx Wi re a
DATA Rx Wi re b
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
(a)(b)
(c)
Tributary cable
8xE1 120 ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(314-331/79..82)
(a) = This prewiring cable is a standard solution; on request is possible to order the single ma-
terials and to make the cable in field.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-35
Fig. 9.33 ETH IDU - 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Lan Ports (RJ45)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
4Pair Shielded Cable
(106-041/76)
(a)(b)
RJ45 Shielded connector
(422-053/63)
(a)
(a) These materials are supplied with the installation materials
(b) The length of this cable is 185m Max for 10 BaseT or 140m Max for 100 BaseT.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-36
Fig. 9.34 ETH IDU - Alarm connections
ALMs
8
6
15
14
7
13
12
5
11
4
3
10
9
2
1
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT2
ODU
CRITICAL
WARNING
TEST
IDU
ALIM OFF
MINOR OR
MAJOR
CEN-IN4
CEN-IN3
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
15 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/86)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/92)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
Alarm meaning
2 IDU IDU alarm
10 MINOR OR
WARNING
11 ODU ODU alarm
4 MAJOR Major alarm
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-37
Fig. 9.35 ETH IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext (USER 1)
USER/Dext
ODU CABLE
CAUT ON
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUT ON
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
USER 1
Dext
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
In case should be used External EOW, use this connector for 1+0/
1+1 IDU configurations
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-38
Fig. 9.36 ETH IDU - 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connection: USER/Dext (USER 2)
USER/Dext
ODU CABLE
CAUT ON
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUT ON
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
USER 2
Dext
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-39
Fig. 9.37 ETH IDU - (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connection
DATA Tx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
GND
CO-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a)
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a)
USER (a)
DATA Rx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
GND
Dext (a)
Dext SRA L
compatible (a)
Dext (a)
WIRING CABLE for
2 1
7 6
1 2
6 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
a) Configuration of User (Co/Contra-directional Clock) or Dext/Dext SRA L compatible
channels is a software controlled operation.
b) If External EOW should be used, the configuration of User is: Contra-directional
Clock.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-40
Fig. 9.38 ETH IDU - Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN)

Rx1
Tx1
ALMs
Rx5
Tx5
USER/Dext
Rx9
Tx9
Rx13
Tx13
USER/Dext I 0
s
Q-LAN V-LAN
SRAL XD
LCT
S
E
' T
T
/
M /
N
W J
M C
CAUTION
Vbattery
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
ODUCABLE
H
A
H
B
H
A
C C
B
H
D B
L U '
L
B
C
D
U
O
'
PS
PS
V-LAN Q-LAN

(10/100 BASE T) (10 BASE T)
VLAN QLAN
V - B U S
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire a
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
1
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
In the ETH IDU this interface is not available should the V-BUS
interface be used
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-41
Fig. 9.39 ETH IDU - Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN)

10 11
SRAL XD-1
10 11
SRAL XD-2
10 11
SRAL XD-n
A
B

B
10 11
10 11
10 11
HUB
B
B
B
B
B
A
SRAL XD-n
SRAL XD-2
SRAL XD-1
EXAMPLE B EXAMPLE A
To LAN
To LAN X
To LAN Y
To LAN Z
KEY: 10 = Q LAN; 11 = V LAN
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-42
Fig. 9.40 ETH IDU - V-BUS Connection
V-BUS
1
6
5
6
U SER /D ext I 0
s
Q -LA N V -LA N
SR A L X D
LC T
'
T
T
E
S
M
W
N
/
C A U TIO N
O D U C A BLE
C
J
M
/
V battery
C A U TIO N
V battery
O D U C A BLE
A
H
B
H
L
B
U
D '
C
A
H H
B
C C
B
L
O
U
D
'
PS
PS
V-BU S
V-BUS
6
7
8
9
5
4
3
1
2
V-DRX-a
V-DRX-b
not used
V-D-a
V-D-b
not used
not used
not used
not used
Ful l Dupl ex
Hal f Dupl ex
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
The V-bus interconnection on for the Controller unit is carried out
by means of 120 ohm twisted-pair cable (max. length 300 m). The
V-bus cable must be correctly terminated by two 120 Ohm
terminations, mounted at the two ends of the cable.
Should be used the V-BUS interface, the V-LAN interface cannot be
used.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-43
Fig. 9.41 ETH IDU - LCT connection (RS 232)
P E R S O N A L
C O M P U T E R
LCT
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRALXD s
Q- LAN V- LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V- BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
9 C male
SUB-D connector
The LCT connector (F interface) can be used also to connect a
SRAL XD to extend a SRAL network.
5 GND Signal Ground
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-44
Fig. 9.42 Primary Power Supply Connections
A 3
A 1
STOTZ
4A
PS (pin A3)
PS (pin A3)
1-8 9-16 17-24 25-32 Interfaces TRIBUTARIES
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Female connector
(422-060/16)
(*)
Female contact
(422-027/31)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/82)
(*)
2x1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded
CRIMPING
SIDE VIEW
A1 = Positive
A3 = Negative
Nominal voltage
-48 Vdc + 20%
(-38.4 to 57.6 Vdc)
STATION
Main negative
power supply
1
st
Base Band
2
nd
Base Band
HDe 18/23/38 GHz
1+0 43.5 W
1+1 78.5 W)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-45
Fig. 9.43 ODU connections (connector coax. type SMA)
ODU 1
ODU 2
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-46
Connections
TRIB.
1 to 8
TRIB.
9 to 16
TRIB.
17 to
24
TRIB.
25 to
32
Tributary cable
8xE1 75 ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(a)(b)(c)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-47
Connections
TRIB.
1 to 8
TRIB.
9 to 16
TRIB.
17 to
24
TRIB.
25 to
32
Tributary cable
8xE1 120ohm
(L=5/10/20/30 m)
(a)(b)(c)
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-48
Fig. 9.46 Alarm connections
ALMs
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
8
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT2
ODU
CRITICAL
WARNING
TEST
IDU
ALIM OFF
6
15
14
7
13
12
5
11
4
3
10
9
2
1
MINOR O
MAJOR
CEN-IN4
CEN-IN3
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
15 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/86)
(*)
Metal shell
(422-030/92)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-49
(Cont.)
Alarm meaning
2 IDU IDU alarm
10 MINOR OR
WARNING
11 ODU ODU alarm
4 MAJOR Major alarm
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-50
Fig. 9.47 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext (USER 1)
USER/Dext
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
USER 1
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-51
Fig. 9.48 64 kbit/s (V.11) service channel connnection: USER/Dext (USER 2)
USER/Dext
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
Metal shell
(422-030/91)
(*)
8-pair double
shield cable
9 C male
SUB-D connector
(422-062/60)
(*)
USER 2
Dext
Dext
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-52
Fig. 9.49 (CH1 and CH2) 64 kbit/s (V11) service channel connnection
DATA Tx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Tx Wire b
DATA Rx Wire a
DATA Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
GND
CO-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a)
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
CLOCK (a)(b)
USER (a) (b)
DATA Rx Wire a
9
5
8
4
3
7
6
2
1
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
CLOCK Tx Wire a
CLOCK Tx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire b
CLOCK Rx Wire a
GND
Dext (a)
Dext SRA L
compatible (a)
Dext (a)
WIRING CABLE for
2 1
7 6
1 2
6 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-53
Fig. 9.50 Supervision connections (Q LAN - V LAN)
V-LAN Q-LAN

(10/100 BASE T) (10 BASE T)
VLAN QLAN
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire a
NOT USED
NOT USED
DATA Rx Wire b
DATA Tx Wire a
DATA Tx Wire b
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
1
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
If the V-BUS interface is used in the 32xE1 IDU, the V-LAN interface
will be not available.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-54
Fig. 9.51 Connection example (Q LAN - V LAN)

10 11
SRAL XD-1
10 11
SRAL XD-2
10 11
SRAL XD-n
A
B

B
10 11
10 11
10 11
HUB
B
B
B
B
B
A
SRAL XD-n
SRAL XD-2
SRAL XD-1
EXAMPLE B EXAMPLE A
To LAN
To LAN X
To LAN Y
To LAN Z
LEGENDA: 10 = Q LAN; 11 = V LAN
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-55
Fig. 9.52 V-BUS Connection
V-BUS
1
6
5
6
V - B U S
( 1 2 8 K b / s D A T A C h a n n e l )
6
7
8
9
5
4
3
1
2
V - D R X - a
V - D R X - b
n o t u s e d
V - D - a
V - D - b
n o t u s e d
n o t u s e d
n o t u s e d
n o t u s e d
F u l l D u p l e x
H a l f D u p l e x
INDOOR ASSEMBLY
The V-BUS interconnection for the controller unit is carried out by means of
120 ohm twisted-pair cable (max. length 300 m). The V-bus cable must be
correcty terminated by two 120 Ohm terminations, mounted at the two ends of
the cable. (Example shown in Fig. 3.91).
If the V-BUS interface is used, the V-LAN interface will be not available.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
9-56
Fig. 9.53 V-BUS Connection example
1 2
3
L max = 300 m
L max = 300 m
DOUBLE TERMINAL
TRIPLE TERMINAL OR MORE
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
For these 120 ohm termination connectors 120 Ohm see Fig. 3.106
For this interconnection cable see Fig. 3.106
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-1
10 ACTIVATION
10.1 PRESETTINGS
In this paragraph instructions are given to check and, if required, to carry out the presettings
relevant to the system type where the equipment is utilized.
There are two presetting types:
G Hardware settings, performed through jumpers or connections
G Software settings, carried out through PC with dedicated software. With regard to the sys-
tem software setting options refer to the Guide to the use of the control software", in the
Operator Manual (OMN).
10.1.1 Hardware settings
In the equipment there are no hardware settings.
10.1.1.1 System E
2
PROM
The IDU contains two different system EEPROMs to store all the NE configurations:
G internal EEPROM in the Controller unit
G external EEPROM (KEY), inserted in the front panel of the Tributary unit.
In the key in the factory have been stored the Serial Number (S/N) and the licence type.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-2
10.2 ACTIVATION
This paragraph includes the procedures for checkings that can be carried out during the instal-
lation while activating the equipment.
10.2.1 Local checks
All the units comprising the equipment are tested and adjusted at the factory in order to optimi-
ze the characteristics: usually, checks on these unit are not required while installed.
Therefore, the procedures here below described have to be utilized only in case of problems
arising in the system, due to equipment malfunction.
The checks are:
G make sure the equipment is correctly equipped as per indications in the Chp. 6.
G check the connection cables (or cable) between the indoor assembly and the outdoor as-
semblies (or assembly) are connected and IDU/ODU connection have been made as per
indications in the par. 13.2 "IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED COAXIAL CA-
BLE" or par. 13.3 "IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE".
G check the equipment is connected to the primary supply voltage as described in the
par. 9.1.1, par. 9.2.1, par. 9.3.1 and par. 9.4.1.
10.2.2 IDU first installation
G Insert the KEY into the right connector on the 16xE1 Tributary unit (see Fig. 10.1) or 1xE3
tributary unit (see Fig. 10.2) or ETH Tributary unit (see Fig. 10.3) or 32xE1 Tributary unit
(see Fig. 10.4).
G Switch ON the IDU by turning the switch situated on the front cover of the 16xE1/32xE1/
ETH/1xE3 Tributary unit.
G At this point the Controller reads the S/N and the type of license of the KEY and stores it
internally.
G The LCT shall now be able to complete the equipment configuration. (Based on the type
of license memorised a basic default configuration will be memorised on the KEY).
G When configuring the equipment through the LCT, the configuration will be automatically
memorised both on the Controller unit and on the KEY.
The KEY must always be inserted during regular equipment configuration.
Should it be removed, the "Memory key disconnected" alarm will be activated.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-3
The following are the alarms associated to the KEY:
10.2.3 Alignment
To make easy the aiming operation, the ODU is equipped with a BNC connector that makes
available the AGC voltage as function of the received field.
10.2.4 Local checks on the equipment
10.2.4.1 Control of the system configuration
Control, by means of the supplied SW (LCT), that the system configuration is according to what
required for the connection in object. In particular, it is necessary to set on both terminals the
configuration, the operating frequency and the ATPC enabling, according to what foreseen by
the specifications related to the interested link.
Eventually, configure the equipment according to what specified in Guide to use of the control
software, in the Operator Manual (OMN).
If a KEY other than that used during the first installation is inserted while the
equipment is ON, the Controller compares the S/N and the type of license
memorized (and that corresponds to the first installation KEY) with that of the
KEY inserted. A data misalignment is detected and the "No setting mode" alarm
is activated which will prevent modifying the configuration through the LCT.
Tab. 10.1 KEY alarms
Alarm Description LCT alarm
Key missing Physically missing Memory key disconnected alarm
activated
Key Fault Non recoverable data failure Key fault alarm activated
Key Mismatch Data memorized on the key
differ from those memorized
on the IDU
No setting mode alarm activated
It is necessary to execute the alignment of the antennas to ensure the correct
operation of the equipment and to make reliable the radio link to the remote
terminal.
For the procedures of adjustment and aiming of the antennas, refer to the
documentation annexed to the antennas themselves.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-4
10.2.4.2 Configuration of IP address
On the first installation, the IDU has a default IP address (192.168.255.3) and then the user can
access the NE, set the network IP address and build the map containing the IP address itself.
For this purpose, refer to the guide to use of the management program, of the OMN manual.
If the network planning was not available, it is necessary to insert, in the two terminals, addres-
ses belonging to two different IP subnetwork (for example: site A = 100.100.100.6; site B =
150.150.150.6), Netmask 255.255.255.0, to be able to control both the Network Elements
10.2.5 Link checks
10.2.5.1 Final checks
After all the local checks and the alignment operation have been executed, check that the levels
of the received power in both the terminals are in compliance to the project specification.
10.2.5.2 Switching test
In presence of protected configurations (1+1 Frequency Diversity or 1+1 Hot Standby), proceed
to the check of the switching functionality.
With the aid of a PDH (2 Mbit/s) frame analyzer, connected to the tributary access points, check
that, after the different switching operations, the service stays active.
10.2.5.3 Restore of the operating conditions
Once the checks on the connection have been executed, restore the operating conditions of the
system (removing the possible manual forcing).
For a correct execution of the switching operations, refer to the guide of use of
the management program, in OMN manual.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-5
10.3 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS
10.3.1 Normal operating conditions
Normal operating conditions of the equipment are indicated as follows:
G Power Supply switch on the 16xE1, 32xE1, ETH or 1xE3 Tributary (ON = position I)
G all red LEDs on the front panel of the units: OFF
G RF output power and RF input power at nominal values.
The normal operating conditions of the front panel LEDs are shown in Fig. 10.5, Fig. 10.6 and
Fig. 10.7, Fig. 10.8.
10.3.2 Alarm conditions
An alarm condition indicates a failure in the outdoor or indoor unit.
An alarm condition in the equipment is indicated by the switching on of a red LED on the front
panel of the failed unit.
The alarms are also processed and managed by the Controller unit. The LCT, connected to the
Controller unit, allows an easy location of the failed unit.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-6
Fig. 10.1 IDU Key position (16xE1 Tributary unit)
IDU ASSEMBLY 16xE1 BASE BAND UNIT
16xE1 TRIBUTARY UNIT
(75 ohm coax)
(75 ohm/120 ohm Sub-D)
16xE1 TRIBUTARY
UNIT (75 ohm)
16xE1 BASE BAND UNIT
(120 ohm LEMO)
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
SIEMENS
V-BUS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
SIEMENS
CONTROLLER UNIT
P/N 634-001/74
CONTROLLER UNIT
P/N 634-001/73
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-7
ODU CABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D '
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
Tx
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODU CABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Rx
34 Mb/s
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
CONTROLLER UNIT
P/N 634-001/74
KEY
IDU ASSEMBLY
1xE3 BASE BAND UNIT 1xE3 TRIBUTARY UNIT
(75 ohm coax)
1xE3 BASE BAND UNIT
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-8
Fig. 10.3 IDU Key position (ETH Tributary unit)
CONTROLLER UNIT
P/N 634-001/74
KEY
IDU ASSEMBLY
16xE1 BASE BAND UNIT ETH TRIBUTARY UNIT
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-9
1-8 9-16 17-24 25-32 InterfacesTRIBUTARIES
CONTROLLER UNIT
P/N 634-001/74
KEY
IDU ASSEMBLY
32xE1 BASE BAND UNIT 32xE1 TRIBUTARY UNIT
75/120 ohm (miniRJ21)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-10
Fig. 10.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (16xE1)
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D
'
PS
'
T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
SI EMENS
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U
'
I 0 C C C O USER/ Dext
2 Mbi t / s I / O TRI BUTARI ES 9
V-BUS
OFF
OFF I
POSITION
16xE1 TRIBUTARY UNIT CONTROLLER UNIT 16xE1 BASE BAND UNIT
IDU ASSEMBLY (16xE1)
GREEN
ON
See
Tab. 6.4 (*)
The status of these LEDs (which identify the active radio channel) depend on the System Type.
In 1+0 or 2x(1+0) configuration only LED CH A is ON (Green).
In 1+1 H/S, FD and PD configurations one LED only is ON (Green or Yellow) on the 16x1 Base
Band Unit.
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-11
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D
'
PS
' T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD s
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
USER/Dext
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U '
V-BUS
Tx Rx
2 Mb/s WST
OFF
OFF
I
POSITION
IDU ASSEMBLY (1xE3)
GREEN
ON
See
Tab. 6.4 (*)
In 1+0 configuration only LED CH A is ON (Green).
In 1+1 H/S, FD and PD configurations one LED only is ON (Green or Yellow) on the 1xE3 Base
Band Unit.
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-12
Fig. 10.7 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (ETH)
OFF
OFF
I
POSITION
ETH TRIBUTARY UNIT CONTROLLER UNIT 16xE1 BASE BAND UNIT
IDU ASSEMBLY (ETH)
GREEN
ON
See
Tab. 6.4 (*)
The status of these LEDs (which identify the active radio channel) depend on the System Type. In 1+0
configuration only LED CH A is ON (Green).
In 1+1 H/S, FD and PD configurations one LED only is ON (Green or Yellow) on the ETH Base Band
Unit.
(*)
See
Tab. 6.4 (*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-13
17-24 25-32
OFF
OFF
I
POSITION
IDU ASSEMBLY (32xE1)
GREEN
ON
See
Tab. 6.2 (*)
In 1+0 configuration only LED CH A is ON (Green).
In 1+1 H/S, FD and PD configurations one LED only is ON (Green or Yellow) on the 32x2 Base
Band Unit.
(*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
10-14
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
11-1
11 LOOP BACK
11.1 Loop-backs
The following loop-backs are provided for maintenance purposes.
11.1.1 Tributary loop-backs (Fig. 11.1)
G Local loop-back (A)
The tributary signal can be looped back in the base-band unit at the input interface level.
This type of loop-back when activated allows testing the integrity of the circuitry related to
line interface access.
G Remote loop-back (B)
Each tributary stream can be looped towards the remote station.
This type of loop-back when activated allows testing connection integrity between two ter-
minals.
Each available tributary (i.e., each enabled tributary) can be looped back either locally or remo-
tely using suitable software commands (test commands), issued via LCT or OSS.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
11-2
Fig. 11.1 Tributary loop-back
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-1
12 MAINTENANCE
12.1 TROUBLESHOOTING AND RESTORING
This paragraph instructs about troubleshooting to be carried out on the equipment.
The malfunctions are pointed out by LEDs on the equipment, on the indoor assembly front pa-
nel (see Fig. 12.1 and Fig. 12.2).
The indications function on the front panel is described in the par. 6.11 "LED, MONITORING
POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES".
The sequence of the recommended actions to locate a faulty part of the equipment, to replace
it and to restore the service, are schematized in Fig. 12.3.
12.1.1 Troubleshooting
The failed unit is located by using the LCT: refer to the document "Guide to the use of the con-
trol software", which is part of the Operator Manual (OMN).
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-2
12.1.2 Unit replacement procedures in 1+0 systems
This paragraph contains the instruction to carry out the system parts fault replacement.
Follow the instructions step by step, otherwise the SW configuration could be lost, and therefore
the LCT is necessary for a new SW configuration setting.
Note: The IDU front panel LEDs give fault status general information; in case of a more deep
investigation about cause and severity one alarm is requested, the LCT is necessary.
12.1.2.1 ODU replacement
1. Disconnect the IDU/ODU cable (ODU side).
2. Replace the ODU and connect again the IDU/ODU cable.
3. Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms)
12.1.2.2 IDU-ODU cable replacement
1. Disconnect the fault IDU-ODU connection cable.
2. Connect a new IDU-ODU cable.
3. Verifies that the LEDs on the 16xE1, 32xE1, ETH, or 1xE3 Tributary unit are in the normal
operating conditions.
4. Otherwise, see Troubleshooting through LCT (OMN manual).
12.1.2.3 Replacement of the IDU units
16xE1, 32xE1 or 1xE3 Base Band Unit
1. Disconnect the power supply cable from the front panel of the unit.
2. Remove the faulty unit.
3. Insert the spare unit.
4. Connect back the power supply cable on the front panel of the unit.
5. Check that the link has been restored (no alarm).
Controller unit
1. Remove the unit (the NE will be lost from LCT).
2. Insert the spare Controller unit. The equipment configuration, that has been memorized on
the KEY, will be automatically stored in the new Controller unit.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-3
16xE1, 32xE1, ETH, or 1xE3 Tributary unit
1. Disconnect all the cables from the front panel of the unit.
2. Switch OFF the unit through the switch placed on the front panel of the unit.
3. Remove the unit.
4. Extract the KEY.
5. Insert the KEY in the spare unit.
6. Insert the spare unit in the subrack.
7. Connect back all the cables.
8. Switch on the unit through the switch placed on the front panel of the unit.
Unit replacement procedures in 1+1 systems
This paragraph contains the instruction to carry out the system parts fault replacement.
Follow the instructions step by step, otherwise the SW configuration could be lost, and therefore
the LCT is necessary for a new SW configuration setting.
Note: The IDU front panel LEDs give fault status general information; in case of a more deep
investigation about cause and severity one alarm is requested, the LCT is necessary.
12.1.2.4 ODU replacement
1. Force ON LINE the other BB and the hitless switch via LCT commands.
2. Perform by LCT the power down command in the ODU to be replaced.
3. Disconnect the IDU/ODU cable (ODU side).
4. Replace the ODU and connect again the IDU/ODU cable.
5. Perform by LCT the power up command in the replaced ODU.
6. Wait until all alarms disappear from alarm list.
7. Wait at least 30 seconds before removing all forcing via LCT commands.
8. Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms).
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-4
12.1.2.5 IDU-ODU cable replacement
1. Force ON LINE the other BB and the hitless switch via LCT commands
2. Perform by LCT the power down command in the relevant ODU.
3. Disconnect the fault IDU-ODU connection cable.
4. Connect a new IDU-ODU cable.
5. Perform by LCT the power up command in the relevant ODU.
8. Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms).
12.1.2.6 Replacement of the IDU units
16xE1, 32xE1 or 1xE3 Base Band Unit
1. Force ON LINE the other BB and the hitless switch via LCT commands.
2. Perform by LCT the power down command in the relevant ODU.
3. Disconnect the power supply and IDU/ODU cables from the front panel of the unit.
4. Remove the faulty unit.
5. Insert the spare unit.
6. Connect back the power supply cable on the front panel of the unit.
7. Wait until the BB will go automatically on line.
8. Perform by LCT the power down command in the relevant ODU line.
9. Connect back the IDU/ODU cable on the front panel of the unit.
10. Perform by LCT the power up command in the relevant ODU.
Controller unit
1. Remove the unit (the NE will be lost from LCT).
2. Insert the spare Controller unit. The equipment configuration, that has been memorized on
the KEY, will be automatically stored in the new Controller unit.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-5
16xE1, 32xE1, ETH, or 1xE3 Tributary unit
1. Disconnect all the cables from the front panel of the unit.
2. Switch OFF the unit through the switch placed on the front panel of the unit.
3. Remove the unit.
4. Extract the KEY.
5. Insert the KEY in the spare unit.
6. Insert the spare unit in the subrack.
7. Connect back all the cables.
8. Switch on the unit through the switch placed on the front panel of the unit.
12.1.3 Configuration change
The configuration change described in this paragraph refers to the change of the capacity or
frequency in 1+1 systems.
1. Force ON LINE the BB unit and the hitless switch via the relevant LCT commands at the
remote station.
2. Force ON LINE the BB unit and the hitless switch via the relevant LCT commands at the
local station.
3. Change the capacity (or the frequency) on the ODU not ON LINE at the remote station.
4. Change the capacity (or the frequency) on the ODU not ON LINE at the local station
5. Force ON LINE the other BB unit at the remote station.
6. Force ON LINE the other BB unit at the local station.
7. Perform the same capacity (or frequency) change in the ODU not ON LINE at the remote
station.
8. Perform the same capacity (or frequency change) in the ODU not ON LINE at the local sta-
tion.
9. Remove all forcing via LCT commands.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-6
12.2 LIST OF SPARE PARTS
The maintenance philosophy consists in the replacement of an outdoor assembly (ODU) or a
unit of the IDU. Therefore all spares consist of outdoor assembly and units that have the same
P/N of the failed ones.
12.2.1 IDU spare parts list
Tab. 12.1 List of spare parts - 16xE1 IDU
Denomination P/N
16xE1 Tributary unit (75 ohm coax) or
16xE1 Tributary unit (75/120 ohm Sub-D) or
16xE1 Tributary unit (120 ohm LEMO)
612-404/37A or
612-404/38A or
612-404/39A
Controller unit (without V-Bus)
controller unit (with V-Bus)
634-001/73A
634-001/74A
16xE1 Base Band unit 612-314/39A
Wired subrack 628-586/26
Cover 333-309/80
Tab. 12.2 List of spare parts - ETH IDU
Denomination P/N
Ethernet Tributary unit 612-404/41A
Controller unit 634-001/74A
Cover 333-309/80
Denomination P/N
1xE3 Tributary unit (75 ohm coax) 612-404/40A
Cover 333-309/80
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-7
12.2.2 ODU spare parts list
Each ODU has been adjusted in factory to a frequency of an RF channel. The list of the avai-
lable ODUs is given in table from Tab. 12.5 to Tab. 12.22.
Denomination P/N
32xE1 Tributary unit (75/120 ohm MiniRJ21) 612-404/65A
Cover 333-309/80
Tab. 12.5 ODU HD/HP 7 GHz
ODU P/N ODU composition
732-241/07-xxx See par. 2.3.15.1 of the UMN Manual
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-8
Tab. 12.13 ODU HD/HP Low Power 38 GHz
732-241/38A-xxx See par. 2.3.15.9 of the UMN Manual
Tab. 12.14 ODU ND 7 GHz
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-9
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-10
12.3 PROCEDURE FOR SPARE PARTS USE
This paragraph illustrates the procedure to use when having to replace the faulty unit of the IDU
and the faulty ODU.
To simplify the description, the following procedures concern the disassembling of the parts to
replace. Obviously to place the spare part back proceed in the opposite manner.
12.3.1 Procedure for the IDU unit replacement
The replacement of the units of the IDU assembly can be carried out in the following manner
while the equipment is operating:
a) Disconnect the cables present on the front panel of the unit to replace.
b) Unscrew the screws present on the unit's front panel.
c) Remove the unit.
Tab. 12.23 ODU HDe 18 GHz
732-241/18E-xxx See par. 2.3.15.10
732-241/23E-xxx See par. 2.3.15.11
732-241/38E-xxx See par. 2.3.15.12
Tab. 12.26 ODU HDe Low Power 38 GHz
732-241/38EA-xxx See par. 2.3.15.13
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-11
12.3.2 Procedure for the ODU replacement
To replace the ODU remove the ODU from the supporting framework fastened to the mast.
The procedure to follow is specified below:
a) Pull out the IF cable.
b) Disconnect ground.
c) Disconnect the RF waveguide.
d) Remove the ODU from the supporting frame.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-12
Fig. 12.1 IDU assembly LEDs
ODUCABLE
CAUTION
Vbattery
H
A
C C
B
H
L
B
C
U
O
D
'
PS
'
T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
SRAL XD
SI EMENS
Q-LAN V-LAN
LCT
PS
CAUTION
Vbattery
ODUCABLE
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U
'
I 0 C C C O
'
T
S
E
T
W
M
/
N
J
C
/
M
A
H B
L
H
B
D
U
'
C C C O
USER/ Dext
2 Mbi t / s I / O TRI BUTARI ES 9
CONTROLLER UNIT 16xE1 (or 1xE3) BASE BAND
IDU ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-13
Fig. 12.2 Ethernet tributary unit LAN Ports LEDs
ETHERNET TRIBUTARY UNIT
Lan Port Led
see Tab. 6.2 (*)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
12-14
Fig. 12.3 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-1
13 TECHNICAL
CHARACTERISTICS
13.1 General characteristics
G Transmission capacity 22 Mbit/s, 42 Mbit/s, 82 Mbit/s,
162 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 4xLAN + 8xE1
G Gross bit rate of the transmitted signal:
G 22 Mbit/s (2xE1) 4.864 Mbit/s
G 162 Mbit/s (16xE1) 38.912 Mbit/s
G 32x2 Mbit/s (32xE1) 76.800 Mbit/s
G
G Note: With the Ethernet IDU (4xLAN + 8xE1) the gross bit rate depends on the license fee
(which enables the on air capacity):
G 162 Mbit/s (16xE1) 38.912 Mbit/s
G Modulation:
G 2/2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2/34 Mbit/s (with ODU ND) 4 levels CPM
G 2/2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2/34 Mbit/s (with ODU HD/HP in HP mode) 4 levels QAM
G 8x2/16x2/34 Mbit/s (with ODU HD/HP in HD mode) 16 levels TCM
G 4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s (with ODU HDe in ND mode) 4 levels QAM
G 8x2/16x2/32x2 Mbit/s (with ODU HDe in HD mode)16 levels TCM
G Demodulation:
G non coherent with Reed Solomon FEC and Viterbi decoding (with ODU ND)
G coherent with Reed Solomon FEC (with ODU HD/HP and HDe)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-2
G RF bands:
RF Bands Operating limits Freq. Range
(GHz)
Tx/Rx Spacing
(MHz)
ITU-R
7 GHz 7.1-7.9 GHz
7.1 - 7.4 161 MHz F.385
7.1 - 7.4 196 MHz F.385 Annex 3
7.4 - 7.7 161 MHz F.385
7.4 - 7.7 154 MHz F.385 Annex 1
7.4 - 7.7 168 MHz F.385 Annex 3
7.75 - 7.975 148.5 MHz Bulgaria
7.4 - 7.9 245 MHz F.385 Annex 4
8 GHz 7.7-8.5 GHz
7.7 - 8.2 311.25 MHz F.386-6 Annex 1
8.275 - 8.5 126 MHz F.386-6 Annex 3
8.275 - 8.5 119 MHz F.386-6 Annex 3
13 GHz 12.75-13.25 GHz 12.75 - 13.25 266 MHz F.497
15 GHz 14.40-15.35 GHz
14.40-15.35 420 MHz F.636
14.40-15.35 490 MHz F.636
14.40-15.35 728 MHz F.636
14.40-15.35 322 MHz F.636
14.40-15.35 336 MHz F.636
14.40-15.35 315 MHz F.636
18 GHz 17.7-19.7 GHz
17.7-19.7 1010 MHz F.595
17.7-19.7 1560 MHz F.595
17.7-19.7 1008 MHz F.595
17.7-19.7 340 MHz F.595
23 GHz 21.2-23.6 GHz
22.0-23.6 1008 MHz F.637Annex1
21.2-23.6 1232 MHz F.637Annex1
21.2-23.6 1200 MHz F.637Annex1
26 GHz 24.5-26.5 GHz 24.5-26.5 1008 MHz F.748
28 GHz 27.5-29.5 GHz 27.5-29.5 1008 MHz F.748 Annex 2
38 GHz 37.0-39.5 GHz 37.0 - 39.5 1260 MHz F.749
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-3
G Channel arrangement:
G ODU ND
2x2 Mbit/s 3.5 MHz
4x2 Mbit/s 7 MHz
8x2 Mbit/s 14 MHz/13.75 MHz (Note 1)
G ODU HD/HP
HP Mode 2x2 Mbit/s 3.5 MHz
4x2 Mbit/s 7 MHz
HD Mode 8x2 Mbit/s 7 MHz
16x2 Mbit/s 14 MHz/13.75 (Note 1)
Note 1: 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz channelling is available for 18 GHz only.
G ODU HDe
NP Mode 4x2 Mbit/s 7 MHz
8x2 Mbit/s 14 MHz
16x2 Mbit/s 28 MHz
HD Mode 8x2 Mbit/s 7 MHz
16x2 Mbit/s 14 MHz
32x2 Mbit/s 28 MHz
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-4
G System gain [dB]
1
:
G ODU ND
1. The values refer to a link with modulation index h=0.33. Should be used a smaller
modulation index, the performances have to be reduced (i.e. to improve the spectrum
efficiency or to get BW
99%
=1CS).
7
GHz
8
GHz
13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz
Typical
BER<10
-3
2xE1 ND 118.0 118.0 113.5 113.5 111.0 110.5 110.0 110.0 108.0
4xE1 ND 115.0 115.0 110.5 110.5 108.0 107.5 107.0 107.0 105.0
8xE1 ND 112.0 112.0 107.5 107.5 105.0 104.5 104.0 104.0 102.0
16xE1/
1xE3
ND 108.0 108.0 103.5 103.5 101.0 100.5 100.0 100.0 98.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1 ND 116.5 116.5 112.0 112.0 109.5 109.0 108.5 108.5 106.5
4xE1 ND 113.5 113.5 109.0 109.0 106.5 106.0 105.5 105.5 103.5
8xE1 ND 110.5 110.5 106.0 106.0 103.5 103.0 102.5 102.5 100.5
16xE1/
1xE3
ND 106.5 106.5 102.0 102.0 99.5 99.0 98.5 98.5 96.5
Guaranteed
BER<10
-3
2xE1 ND 114.0 114.0 109.5 109.5 107.0 106.5 106.0 106.0 104.0
4xE1 ND 111.0 111.0 106.5 106.5 104.0 103.5 103.0 103.0 101.0
8xE1 ND 108.0 108.0 103.5 103.5 101.0 100.5 100.0 100.0 98.0
16xE1/
1xE3
ND 104.0 104.0 99.5 99.5 97.0 96.5 96.0 96.0 94.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1 ND 112.5 112.5 108.0 108.0 105.5 105.0 104.5 104.5 102.5
4xE1 ND 109.5 109.5 105.0 105.0 102.5 102.0 101.5 101.5 99.5
8xE1 ND 106.5 106.5 102.0 102.0 99.5 99.0 98.5 98.5 96.5
16xE1/
1xE3
ND 102.5 102.5 98.0 98.0 95.5 95.0 94.5 94.5 92.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-5
G ODU HD/HP
(*) Low Power version.
7
GHz
8
GHz
15
GHz
18
GHz
23
GHz
26
GHz
28
GHz
38
GHz
38 GHz (*)
Typical
BER<10
-3
2xE1
HP 118.0 116.0 112.0 117.5 113.0 112.0 112.0 108.5 93.5
HD
4xE1
HP 115.0 113.0 109.0 114.5 110.0 109.0 109.0 105.5 90.5
HD
8xE1
HP 112.0 110.0 106.0 111.5 107.0 106.0 106.0 102.5 87.5
HD 106.5 104.5 100.5 106.0 101.5 100.5 100.5 97.0 82.0
16xE1/
1xE3
HP 109.0 97.0 103.0 108.5 104.0 103.0 103.0 99.5 84.5
HD 103.5 101.5 97.5 103.0 98.5 97.5 97.5 94.0 79.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1
HP 116.5 114.5 110.5 116.0 111.5 110.5 110.5 107.0 92.0
HD
4xE1
HP 113.5 111.5 107.5 113.0 108.5 107.5 107.5 104.0 89.0
HD
8xE1
HP 110.5 108.5 104.5 110.0 105.5 104.5 104.5 101.0 86.0
HD 105.0 103.0 99.0 104.5 100.0 99.0 99.0 95.5 80.5
16xE1/
1xE3
HP 107.5 105.5 101.5 107.0 102.5 101.5 101.5 98.0 83.0
HD 102.0 100.0 96.0 101.5 97.0 96.0 96.0 92.5 77.5
Guaranteed
BER<10
-3
2xE1
HP 114.0 112.0 108.0 113.5 109.0 108.0 108.0 104.5 89.5
HD
4xE1
HP 111.0 109.0 105.0 110.5 106.0 105.0 105.0 101.5 86.5
HD
8xE1
HP 108.0 106.0 102.0 107.5 103.0 102.0 102.0 98.5 83.5
HD 102.5 100.5 96.5 102.0 97.5 96.5 96.5 93.0 78.0
16xE1/
1xE3
HP 105.0 103.0 99.0 104.5 100.0 98.0 98.0 95.5 80.5
HD 99.5 97.5 93.5 99.0 94.5 93.5 93.5 90.0 75.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1
HP 112.5 110.5 106.5 112.0 107.5 106.5 106.5 103.0 88.0
HD
4xE1
HP 109.5 107.5 103.5 109.0 104.5 103.5 103.5 100.0 85.0
HD
8xE1
HP 106.5 104.5 100.5 106.0 101.5 100.5 100.5 97.0 82.0
HD 101.0 99.0 95.0 100.5 96.0 95.0 95.0 91.5 76.5
16xE1/
1xE3
HP 103.5 101.5 97.5 103.0 98.5 97.5 97.5 94.0 79.0
HD 98.0 96.0 92.0 97.5 93.0 92.0 92.0 88.5 73.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-6
G ODU HDe
G note 1: with 16xE1/ETH/1xE3 IDU only.
G note 2: with 32xE1 IDU only.
18 GHz 23 GHz 38 GHz 38 GHz(*)
Typical
BER<10
-3
4xE1
(note 1)
ND 111.5 110.0 105.5 90.5
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND 108.5 107.0 102.5 87.5
HD 103.0 101.5 97.0 82.0
16xE1/1xE3
(note 1)
ND 105.5 104.0 99.5 84.5
HD 100.0 98.5 94 79.0
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD 97.0 95.5 91.0 76.0
BER<10
-6
4xE1
(note 1)
ND 110.0 108.5 104.0 89.0
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND 107.0 105.5 101.0 86.0
HD 101.5 100.0 95.5 80.5
16xE1/1xE3
(note 1)
ND 104.0 102.5 98.0 83.0
HD 98.5 97 92.5 77.5
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD 95.5 94.0 89.5 74.5
Guaranteed
BER<10
-3
4xE1
(note 1)
ND 107.5 106.0 101.5 86.5
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND 104.5 103.0 98.5 83.5
HD 99.0 97.5 93.0 78.0
16xE1/1xE3
(note 1)
ND 101.5 100.0 95.5 80.5
HD 96.0 94.5 90.0 75.0
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD 93.0 91.5 87.0 72.0
BER<10
-6
4xE1
(note 1)
ND 106 104.5 100.0 85.0
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND 103 101.5 97.0 82.0
HD 97.5 96 91.5 76.5
16xE1/1xE3
(note 1)
ND 100 98,5 94.0 79.0
HD 94,5 93 88.5 73.5
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD 91.5 90 85.5 70.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-7
G Tuning range: refer to the ODU frequency tables in doc.
"Equipment composition" of the UMN Manual.
G IDU-ODU interface:
G Line code B3ZS
G Bit rate 51.84 Mb/s (with 16x2 BB unit)
155.520 Mb/s (with 32x2 BB unit)
G Max IDU/ODU distance:
G with coax. Braided cable 200 m (with 16x2 BB unit)
50 m (with 32x2 BB unit)
G with coax 1/4 cable 300 m (with 16x2 BB unit)
80 m (with 32x2 BB unit)
G IDU/ODU protection according to IEC 1000-4-5, X level
2
, criterion 2
2. X=10kV/p; 1.5/50 sec
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-8
13.1.1 ODU ND characteristics
13.1.1.1 Transmitter
The following characteristics refer to points set down in Fig. 13.1. Unless otherwise stated, the
RF parameters have to be understood having been measured at point C' and valid for the tem-
perature range defined in par. 13.1.7.
G Max output power [dBm]:
G Output power adjustment [dB]:
G ATPC range P
min
to P
max
G ATPC threshold software selectable
G Output power in squelched condition mode -50 dBm (RBW=1MHz)
G Tx frequency tolerance 5 ppm BOL (Beginning Of Life)
8 ppm EOL (End Of Life)
G Tuning step 250 kHz
G Output signal spectral power density:
G 22 Mbit/s (2xE1)
G 42 Mbit/s (4xE1) see mask of Fig. 13.2
G 82 Mbit/s (8xE1)
G 162 Mbit/s (16xE1) or
G 1x34 Mbit/s (1xE3)
G External spurious emission:
G 30 MHz - 21.2 GHz -50 dBm (RBW=1MHz)
7
GHz
8
GHz
13
GHz
15
GHz
18
GHz
23
GHz
26
GHz
28
GHz
38
GHz
PTx_max
(dBm)
typical ND 24 24 20 20 18 18 18 18 17
guaranteed ND 22 22 18 18 16 16 16 16 15
7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz 26/28/38 GHz
Attenuation value [dB]: 0...24 0...20
Accuracy [dB]
1)
1 Varying the attenuation, the accuracy changes, with linear function.
from 2 to 3.5 from 2 to 3.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-9
G 21.2 GHz - 60 GHz -30 dBm (RBW=1MHz)
G Return loss 16 dB
13.1.1.2 Receiver
The following characteristics refer to the points set down in Fig. 13.3. Unless otherwise stated,
the RF parameters have to be understood as measures at point C and valid for the temperature
range defined in par. 13.1.7.
G Max. input power (BER 10
-11
) -20 dBm
G Max. input power to prevent from
permanent damaging -10 dBm
G Rx thresholds [dBm]
1)
:
7
GHz
8
GHz
13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz
Typical
threshold
BER<10
-3
2xE1 ND -94.0 -94.0 -93.5 -93.5 -93.0 -92.5 -92.0 -92.0 -91.0
4xE1 ND -91.0 -91.0 -90.5 -90.5 -90.0 -89.5 -89.0 -89.0 -88.0
8xE1 ND -88.0 -88.0 -87.5 -87.5 -87.0 -86.5 -86.0 -86.0 -85.0
16xE1/
1xE3
ND -84.0 -84.0 -83.5 -83.5 -83.0 -82.5 -82.0 -82.0 -81.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1 ND -92.5 -92.5 -92.0 -92.0 -91.5 -91.0 -90.5 -90.0 -89.5
4xE1 ND -89.5 -89.5 -89.0 -89.0 -88.5 -88.0 -87.5 -87.0 -86.5
8xE1 ND -86.5 -86.5 -86.0 -86.0 -85.5 -85.0 -84.5 -84.0 -83.5
16xE1/
1xE3
ND -82.5 -82.5 -82.0 -82.0 -81.5 -81.0 -80.5 -80.0 -79.5
Guaranteed
threshold
BER<10
-3
2xE1 ND -92.0 -92.0 -91.5 -91.5 -91.0 -90.5 -90.0 -90.0 -89.0
4xE1 ND -89.0 -89.0 -88.5 -88.5 -88.0 -87.5 -87.0 -87.0 -86.0
8xE1 ND -86.0 -86.0 -85.5 -85.5 -85.0 -84.5 -84.0 -84.0 -83.0
16xE1/
1xE3
ND -82.0 -82.0 -81.5 -81.5 -81.0 -80.5 -80.0 -80.0 -79.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1 ND -90.5 -90.5 -90.0 -90.0 -89.5 -89.0 -88.5 -88.5 -87.5
4xE1 ND -87.5 -87.5 -87.0 -87.0 -86.5 -86.0 -85.5 -85.5 -84.5
8xE1 ND -84.5 -84.5 -84.0 -84.0 -83.5 -83.0 -82.5 -82.5 -81.5
16xE1/
1xE3
ND -80.5 -80.5 -80.0 -80.0 -79.5 -79.0 -78.5 -78.5 -77.5
1. The Rx Threshold Values given in the table are referred to SRAL XD like modulation
index (Bandwidth 99% > 1CS).
The values are 1 dB less, if different modulation index (Bandwidth 99% 1CS) is
used.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-10
13.1.2 ODU HD/HP characteristics
* Low Power version
G Output power squelched condition mode -50 dBm (RBW=1MHz)
G 22 Mbit/s (2xE1)
G 42 Mbit/s (4xE1) see mask of Fig. 13.5 - HP mode
G 82 Mbit/s (8xE1) see mask of Fig. 13.6-Fig. 13.7 - HD mode
G 162 Mbit/s (16xE1)
G 1x34 Mbit/s (1xE3)
7 GHz 8 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz
38 GHz
(*)
PTx_ma
x (dBm)
typical
HP 23 22 20 24 20 20 20 17 2
HD 18 17 15 19 15 15 15 12 -3
guaranteed
HP 21 20 18 22 18 18 18 15 0
HD 16 15 13 17 13 13 13 10 -5
7 GHz 8 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz
38 GHz
(*)
Attenuation value
[dB]
HP 0-19 0-18 0-20 0-20 0-15 0-18 0-18 0-20 0-20
HD 0-14 0-13 0-15 0-15 0-10 0-13 0-13 0-15 0-15
Accuracy [dB]
1)
* Low Power Version
from 2 to 3.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-11
G Return loss 16 dB
G ATPC range P
min
+ software selectable ATPC range
13.1.2.2 Receiver
G Max. input power
(BER 10
-9
without FEC) -20 dBm
1)
:
7
GHz
8
GHz
15
GHz
18
GHz
23
GHz
26
GHz
28
GHz
38
GHz
Typical
threshold
BER<10
-3
2xE1
HP -95.0 -94.0 -92.0 -93.5 -93.0 -92.0 -92.0 -91.5
HD
4xE1
HP -92.0 -91.0 -89.0 -90.5 -90.0 -89.0 -89.0 -88.5
HD
8xE1
HP -89.0 -88.0 -86.0 -87.5 -87.0 -86.0 -86.0 -85.5
HD -88.5 -87.5 -85.5 -87.0 -86.5 -85.5 -85.5 -85.0
16xE1
/1xE3
HP -86.0 -85.0 -83.0 -84.5 -84.0 -83.0 -83.0 -82.5
HD -85.5 -84.5 -82.5 -84.0 -83.5 -82.5 -82.5 -82.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1
HP -93.5 -92.5 -90.5 -92.0 -91.5 -90.5 -90.5 -90.0
HD
4xE1
HP -90.5 -89.5 -87.5 -89.0 -88.5 -87.5 -87.5 -87.0
HD
8xE1
HP -87.5 -86.5 -84.5 -86.0 -85.5 -84.5 -84.5 -84.0
HD -87.0 -86.0 -84.0 -85.5 -85.0 -84.0 -84.0 -83.5
16xE1
/1xE3
HP -84.5 -83.5 -81.5 -83.0 -82.5 -81.5 -81.5 -81.0
HD -84.0 -83.0 -81.0 -82.5 -82.0 -81.0 -81.0 -80.5
cont.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-12
The values are 1 dB less, if different modulation index (Bandwidth 99% = 1CS) is
used.
7
GHz
8
GHz
15
GHz
18
GHz
23
GHz
26
GHz
28
GHz
38
GHz
Guaranteed
threshold
BER<10
-3
2xE1
HP -93.0 -92.0 -90.0 -91.5 -91.0 -90.0 -90.0 -89.5
HD
4xE1
HP -90.0 -89.0 -87.0 -88.5 -88.0 -87.0 -87.0 -86.5
HD
8xE1
HP -87.0 -86.0 -84.0 -85.5 -85.0 -84.0 -84.0 -83.5
HD -86.5 -85.5 -83.5 -85.0 -84.5 -83.5 -83.5 -83.0
16xE1
/1xE3
HP -84.0 -83.0 -81.0 -82.5 -82.0 -81.0 -81.0 -80.5
HD -83.5 -82.5 -80.5 -82.0 -81.5 -80.5 -80.5 -80.0
BER<10
-6
2xE1
HP -91.5 -90.5 -88.5 -90.0 -89.5 -88.5 -88.5 -88.0
HD
4xE1
HP -88.5 -87.5 -85.5 -87.0 -86.5 -85.5 -85.5 -85.0
HD
8xE1
HP -85.5 -84.5 -82.5 -84.0 -83.5 -82.5 -82.5 -82.0
HD -85.0 -84.0 -82.0 -83.5 -83.0 -82.0 -82.0 -81.5
16xE1
/1xE3
HP -82.5 -81.5 -79.5 -81.0 -80.5 -79.5 -79.5 -79.0
HD -82.0 -81.0 -79.0 -80.5 -80.0 -79.0 -79.0 -78.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-13
13.1.3 ODU HDe characteristics
G ATPC range P
min
+ software selectable ATPC range
G Output power squelched condition mode -50 dBm (RBW=1MHz)
18 GHz 23 GHz 38 GHz 38 GHz (*)
PTx_max (dBm) typical ND 21 20 17 2
HD 16 15 12 -3
guaranteed ND 19 18 15 0
HD 14 13 10 -5
18 GHz 23 GHz 38 GHz 38 GHz (*)
Attenuation value [dB] ND 0-20 0-20 0-20 0-20
HD 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15
Accuracy [dB]
1)
from 2 to 3.5
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-14
G 42 Mbit/s (4xE1)
G 82 Mbit/s (8xE1) see mask of Fig. 2.45 - ND mode
G 16x2 Mbits (16xE1) see mask of Fig. 2.46 - HD mode
G 1x34 Mbits (1xE3)
G 322 Mbit/s (32xE1)
G Return loss 16 dB
13.1.3.2 Receiver
G Max. input power
(BER 10
-9
without FEC) -20 dBm
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-15
1)
:
G note 1: with 16xE1/ETH/1xE3 IDU only.
G note 2: with 32xE1 IDU only.
18 GHz 23 GHz 38 GHz
Typical thres-
hold
BER<10
-3
4xE1
(note 1)
ND -90.5 -90.0 -88.5
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND -87.5 -87.0 -85.5
HD -87.0 -86.5 -85.0
16xE1/
1xE3
(note 1)
ND -84.5 -84.0 -82.5
HD -84.0 -83.5 -82.0
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD -81.0 -80.5 -79.0
BER<10
-6
4xE1
(note 1)
ND -89.0 -88.5 -87.0
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND -86.0 -85.5 -84.0
HD -85.5 -85.0 -83.5
16xE1/
1xE3
(note 1)
ND -83.0 -82.5 -81.0
HD -82.5 -82.0 -80.5
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD -79.5 -79.0 -77.5
Guaranteed
threshold
BER<10
-3
4xE1
(note 1)
ND -88.5 -88.0 -86.5
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND -85.5 -85.0 -83.5
HD -85.0 -84.5 -83.0
16xE1/
1xE3
(note 1)
ND -82.5 -82.0 -80.5
HD -82.0 -81.5 -80.0
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD -79.0 -78.5 -77.0
BER<10
-6
4xE1
(note 1)
ND -87.0 -86.5 -85.0
HD
8xE1
(note 1)
ND -84.0 -83.5 -82.0
HD -83.5 -83.0 -81.5
16xE1/
1xE3
(note 1)
ND -81.0 -80.5 -79.0
HD -80.5 -80.0 -78.5
32xE1
(note 2)
ND
HD -77.5 -77.0 -75.5
The values are 1 dB less, if different modulation index (Bandwidth 99% = 1CS) is
used.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-16
13.1.4 IDU characteristics
13.1.4.1 Protected configuration specification
G Transmission static delay recovery capability
(relevant only for FD 1+1, hitless mode) 32 bit
G Transmission dynamic delay
automatic recovery capability 8 bit
13.1.4.2 Operating mode
G Rx hitless switch unrevertive
G Hardware logic switches revertive/unrevertive in hot-stand-by
configuration; unrevertive in frequency
diversity configuration
13.1.4.3 Hardware alarm detection time
G Failure alarm 1 ms
13.1.4.4 Operational switching time
G Tx hardware switch for F.D. < 1 ms
G Rx hardware switch < 1 ms
G Tx RF switch for
hot-stand-by < 50 ms
G Hitless switch negligible
G Rx total recovery time (failures) < 300 ms (maximum value)
< 100 ms (typical value)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-17
13.1.4.5 Characteristics of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface (E1)
The tributary interface can be 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm.
G Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 50 ppm
G Code HDB3
G Pulse shape see Fig. 13.13
G Load impedance 75 Ohm o 120 Ohm
G Nominal peak voltage of a mark (pulse):
G 75 Ohm 2.37 V
G 120 Ohm 3 V
G Nominal peak voltage of a "space" (no pulse)
G 75 Ohm 0 0.237 V
G 120 Ohm 0 0.3 V
G Nominal pulse length 244 ns
G Output return loss 10 dB,
for f = 51.2 to 3072 kHz
G Input return loss:
G f = 51 to 102 kHz 18 dB
G f = 102 to 2048 kHz 22 dB
G f = 2048 to 3072 kHz 18 dB
13.1.4.6 Characteristics of 34 Mbit/s tributary Interface (E3)
G Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 50 ppm
G Code HDB3
G Pulse shape see Fig. 13.14
G Load impedance 75 Ohm
G Nominal peak voltage of
a mark (pulse):
G 75 Ohm 1 V
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-18
G Nominal peak voltage of
a "space" (no pulse)
G 75 Ohm 0 0.1 V
G Nominal pulse length 14.55 ns
G Output return loss 10 dB,
for f = 860 51.500 kHz
G Output max peak-to-peak jitter 5
13.1.4.7 Characteristics of Ethernet ports interface
G Standard IEEE 802.3 (10Base-T) and
802.3u (100Base-Tx)
G Port 10Base-T or 100Base-Tx, available on one
connector RJ-45
G Duplex half / full duplex
13.1.4.8 Characteristics of channel auxiliary interfaces
LCT channel
G Channel type 38.4 kbit/s asynchronous data channel
G Electrical interface
1)
RS-232C
V-LAN
G Channel type IEEE 802.3
G Electrical interface 10BASE-T
V-BUS
G Channel type 128 kbit/s data bus with burst mode
(HDLC frame)
G Electrical interface proprietary
User channel
G Channel type
2)
64 kbit/s synchronous data channel
1. The IDU is considered as DCE.
2. The user channel can be configured (by software) as codirectional or counter-
directional.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-19
G Electrical interface V.11
D
1)
channel (external)
G Channel type 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel
G Electrical interface V.11
Q-LAN
G Channel type IEEE 802.3 and 802.3U
G Electrical interface 10/100BASE-T
Electrical alarms interface
G Input/Output lines OPEN/CLOSED criteria
G Input lines:
G OPEN criterion -3V to +2V voltage to ground with 60 kohm
series
G CLOSED criterion -3V to +2V voltage to ground with 200 ohm
series
G Output lines
G OPEN criterion
G Potential negative/positive to ground (from external
source)
G Max. voltage 72V
G Max. sinking current 0.1 mA
G CLOSED criterion
G Potential negative/positive to ground (from external
source)
G Max. voltage 72V
G Max. continuous current 60 mA
G Residual voltage
(on the contact) 2V
G Surge immunity accord. to IEC 1000-4-5, Class 3, criterion 2
1. The external D channel is alternative to the user channel.
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-20
13.1.4.9 Power supply characteristics
G Input voltage range -38.4V to -57.6V
G Automatic power-up voltage -37.5V 0.5V
G Automatic shutdown voltage -36.5V 0.5V
G Protection against reversal of
battery polarity yes
G Maximum current load @ minimum
input voltage 4.5A
G Inrush current during equipment
start-up 10A
G Surge immunity accord. to IEC 1000-4-5, Class 3, criterion 2
13.1.5 Guaranteed consumptions
G ODU ND Systems Consumptions
G ODU HD Systems Consumptions
(*) Low Power version
ODU ND
7 GHz 8 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz
22W 22W 19.5W 20W 20W 20W 21.5W 21.5W 22.5W
IDU E1/ETH
1+0
13.5W 35.5W 35.5W 33W 33.5W 33.5W 33.5W 35W 35W 36W
IDU E1/ETH
1+1
18.5W 62.5W 62.5W 57.5W 58.5W 58.5W 58.5W 61.5W 61.5W 63.5W
IDU E3 1+0 12W 34W 34W 31.5W 32W 32W 32W 33.5W 33.5W 34.5W
IDU E3 1+1 16W 60W 60W 55W 56W 56W 56W 59W 59W 61W
ODU HD
7 GHz 8 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz 38 GHz (*)
38W 38W 41W 35W 37.5W 32W 36.5W 32W 26W
IDU E1/ETH 1+0 13.5W 51.5W 51.5W 54.5W 48.5W 51W 45.5W 50W 45.5W 49.5W
IDU E1/ETH 1+1 18.5W 94.5W 94.5W 100.5W 88.5W 93.5W 82.5W 91.5W 82.5W 70W
IDU E3 1+0 12W 50W 50W 53W 47W 49.5W 44W 48.5W 44W 38W
IDU E3 1+1 16W 92W 92W 98W 86W 88.5W 80W 89W 80W 68W
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-21
G ODU HDe Systems Consumptions
13.1.6 Mechanical characteristics
The IDU can be arranged for the installation, by means of two different supporting brackets, in
standard ETSI or 19" racks.
The max. IDU overall dimensions are:
G height 44 mm (standard 19")
G width 533 mm
G depth 243.5 mm
G weight (full equipped) 4 kg
The ODU is arranged for pole mounting. On customer request, it can be delivered with the an-
tenna.
The ND/HDe ODU and HD/HP ODU mechanical characteristics are:
ODU HDe 18 GHz 23 GHz 38 GHz 38 GHz (*)
30W 30W 30W 24W
IDU E1/ETH 1+0 13.5W 43.5W 43.5W 43.5W 37.5W
IDU E1/ETH 1+1 18.5W 78.5W 78.5W 78.5W 66.5W
IDU E3 1+0 12W 42W 42W 42W 36W
IDU E3 1+1 16W 76W 76W 76W 64W
(ND/HDe) ODU (HD/HP) ODU
G height 267 mm --
G width 281 mm 290 mm
G depth 123 mm 164 mm
G weight 4.3 kg 7.5 kg
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-22
13.1.7 Environmental conditions
The equipment complies with ETSI EN 300 019 Rec.
IDU meets the following ETSI classes:
G Transport ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3
G Stationary utilization ETS 300 019-1-3 Version 2.2.2 Class 3.2
G Storage ETS 300 019-1-1 Class 1.3
the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted, for which the climatic diagram of Fig. 13.15
and Fig. 13.17 is valid.
ODU meets the following ETSI classes:
G Transport ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3
G Stationary utilization ETS 300 019-1-4 Version 2.1.1 Class 4.1
G Storage ETS 300 019-1-1 Class 1.3
the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted, for which the climatic diagram of Fig. 13.16
and Fig. 13.17.
13.1.8 EMC/EMI characteristics
The equipment is compliant to EMI/EMC parameters according to the above listed standards
and to ETSI standards EN 301 489-1 e EN 301 489-4.
G Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2, criterion 1
Level 2 ( 4kV contact), level 3 ( 8kV air ),
G RF electromagnetic field immunity accord. to IEC 61000-4-3, Level 2, criterion 1
(80-2000 MHz) (10 V/m for IDU and 30 V/m for ODU)
G Electrical Fast Transient/ accord. to IEC 61000-4-4, Level 2, criterion 1
Burst (EFT/B) immunity (DC lines 1kV; Signal and control lines 0.5kV)
G Surge immunity accord. to IEC 61000-4-5, criterion 2
Class 2 (Signal and control lines 0.5kV)
G Radio frequency common mode accord. to IEC 61000-4-6, Level 2 (3 V
rms
)
(0.15-80 MHz) criterion 1
G Conducted emission according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B
G Radiated emission according to EN 55022/CISPR22, Class B
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-23
N.B.:
G criterion 1: no degradation of normal performance (no errors)
G criterion 2: degradation of normal performance / loss of functionality, with auto recovery
13.1.9 Safety characteristics
G Safety according to EN 60950-1, Class I
13.1.10 Antenna P/N
Tab. 13.1 Antenna P/N
Frequency Band
(GHz)
Antenna Diameter (m) Feeder flange
0.2 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.2
7 - - X - X PDR 84
8 - - X - X PDR 84
13 - - X X X PBR 120
15 - X X X X PBR 140
18 - X X X X PBR 220
23 X X X X X PBR 220
38 X X X - - PBR 320
Antennas P/N: 601-xxx/yy
Frequency
Diameter
Fix part
Example: 38 GHz diameter 0.6 m antenna P/N 601-060/38
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-24
13.2 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH BRAIDED COAXIAL CABLE
See Fig. 13.18.
13.2.1 Characteristics
Tab. 13.2 Construction characteristics
ANDREW INTERCOND
Inner Conductor Diameter (mm) 1.78 1.78
Dielectric Diameter (mm) 4.83 4.90
Outer Conductor Diameter (mm) 4.98 6.00
Standard Jacket Diameter (mm) 7.62 7.60
Tab. 13.3 Mechanical characteristics
ANDREW INTERCOND
Weight (kg/m) 0.08 0.095
Min. Bending Radius single bend (mm) > 22.2 > 25
Tensile Strength (kg) 120 50
Bending Moment (N m) 0.52 -
Crash Strength (kg/mm) 0.54 -
Max. Standard Hanger Spacing (m) 1 -
Tab. 13.4 Range of temperature
ANDREW INTERCOND
Recommended Temperature for Installation (C) - 40 / + 85 - 40 / + 85
Recommended Storage for Installation (C) - 70 / + 85 - 40 / + 85
Operating Temperature (C) - 40 / + 85 - 40 / + 85
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-25
Tab. 13.5 Electrical characteristics
ANDREW INTERCOND
Characteristics Impedance (ohm) 50 50
Relative Propagation Velocity (%) 85 -
Capacitance (pF/m) 79.10 -
Maximun Operating Frequency (MHz) 2450 -
Peak Power Rating (kW) 10 10
DC Resistance : Inner Conductor (ohm/km) 6.9 7.20
DC Resistance : Outer Conductor (ohm/km) 7.25 5.32
DC Breakdown (V) 2000 -
Inductance (H/m) 0.20 0.20
Tab. 13.6 Attenuation, (dB/100) Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient temperature
24C
ANDREW INTERCOND
30 MHz 3.50 -
50 MHz 4.50 -
150 MHz 7.80 7.80
450 MHz 13.70 13.70
900 MHz 19.7 -
1500 MHz 25.70 -
1700 MHz - 27.50
2000 MHz 30.0 -
2200 MHz - 31.30
2300 MHz 33.9 33.1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-26
Tab. 13.7 Average Power Rating, kW Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 40C; inner conductor temperature 100C;
ANDREW INTERCOND
30 MHz 2.10 -
50 MHz 1.60 -
150 MHz 0.92 -
450 MHz 0.52 -
900 MHz 0.36 -
1500 MHz 0.28 -
2000 MHz 0.24 -
2300 MHz 0.22 -
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-27
13.3 IDU/ODU CONNECTION WITH 1/4 COAXIAL CABLE
See Fig. 13.19.
13.3.1 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side
See Fig. 13.20.
13.3.2 Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal sets
G The ANDREW and RFS-Kabelmetal material sets are alternative to each other.
G The listed quantities refer to a single IDU/ODU connection.
G NOTE 1 = The length of one IDU/ODU connection is 300 mt Max. (80m for 32xE1 IDU)
* Commercial reference.
Tab. 13.8 Andrew set
P/N Description Unit Q.ty
104-009/42
(314-327/79)*
1/4 LDF1RN - 50 ohm COAXIAL CABLE Mt. NOTE
1
597-523/94A
(597-523/94)*
1/4 COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES Nr. 1
421-008/88 STRAIGHT N type COAX N-PLUG 1
421-008/84 90 N type COAX N-PLUG 1
333-031/19 GROUNDING KIT 1
Tab. 13.9 RFS-Kabelmetal set
P/N Description Unit Q.ty
104-009/33
(314-327/79)*
1/4 CuH - 50 ohm COAXIAL CABLE Mt. NOTE
1
597-523/94B
(597-523/94)*
1/4 COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES Nr. 1
421-008/24 STRAIGHT N type COAX N-PLUG 1
421-008/23 90 N type COAX N-PLUG 1
333-032/16 GROUNDING KIT 1
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-28
13.3.3 Characteristics
Tab. 13.10 Construction characteristics
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
Inner Conductor Diameter (mm) 2.6 2.4
Dielectric Diameter (mm) 6.7 6.0
Outer Conductor Diameter (mm) 7.7 7.5
Standard Jacket Diameter (mm) 9 10.0
Tab. 13.11 Mechanical characteristics
Weight (kg/m) 0.09 0.13
Min. Bending Radius single bend (mm) 38 40
Min. Bending Radius repeated bends
(mm)
76 120
Number of Bends Min. (tipical) 15 (30) -
Tensile Strength (kg) 91 -
Bending Moment (N m) 1.33 -
Max. Tensile Force (N) - 650
Crash Strength (kg/mm) 1.4 -
Max. Standard Hanger Spacing (m) 0.5 -
Tab. 13.12 Range of temperature
Recommended Temperature for
Installation
(C) - 25 / + 60 - 10 / + 60
Recommended Storage for Instal-
lation
(C) - 30 / + 80 -
Operating Temperature (C) - 30 / + 80 -
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-29
Tab. 13.13 Electrical characteristics
Characteristics Impedance (ohm) 50 50
Relative Propagation Velocity (%) 87 82
Capacitance (pF/m) 76.8 82
Maximun Operating Frequency (MHz) 15800 3000
Cut-off Frequency (MHz) - 18700
Peak RF Voltage Rating (kV) 1.1 0.83
Peak Power Rating (kW) 12.1 6.9
DC Resistance : Inner Conductor (ohm/km) 5.15 4.1
DC Resistance : Outer Conductor (ohm/km) 3.33 3.5
DC Breakdown (V) 2200 -
Inductance (H/m) 0.19 -
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-30
Tab. 13.14 Attenuation, (dB/100m) Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 24C
10 MHz - 1.32
30 MHz 2.20 2.3
100 MHz 4.08 4.3
150 MHz 5.03 -
200 MHz - 6.1
300 MHz 7.22 7.6
450 MHz 8.94 9.4
600 MHz 10.42 -
824 MHz 12.36 -
894 MHz 12.92 -
900 MHz - 13.7
960 MHz 13.43 -
1000 MHz 13.73 -
1500 MHz 17.15 18.2
1700 MHz 18.38 -
1800 MHz - 20.1
2000 MHz 20.13 -
2300 MHz 21.77 23.1
3000 MHz - 27.0
4000 MHz 29.89
6000 MHz 37.94
10000 MHz 51.72
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-31
Tab. 13.15 Average Power Rating, kW Standard conditions: VSWR 1.0; ambient
temperature 40C; inner conductor temperature 100C;
10 MHz - 4.4
30 MHz 3.38 2.51
100 MHz 1.85 1.36
150 MHz 1.51 -
200 MHz - 0.95
300 MHz 1.07 0.77
450 MHz 0.871 0.62
600 MHz 0.756 -
824 MHz 0.644 -
894 MHz 0.618 -
900 MHz - 0.43
960 MHz 0.579 -
1000 MHz 0.585 -
1500 MHz 0.477 0.32
1700 MHz 0.448 -
1800 MHz - 0.294
2000 MHz 0.413 -
2300 MHz 0.385 0.257
3000 MHz - 0.221
4000 MHz 0.292 -
6000 MHz 0.239 -
10000 MHz 0.185 -
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-32
Fig. 13.1 ETSI Block diagram of Tx RF side
MOD
E Z
TRANSMIT.
A
RF Tx
FILTER
B
BRANCHING
NETWORK
C
FEEDER
D
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-33
Fig. 13.2 Mask of the RF signal for 7 to 38 GHz ODU ND according to the traffic capacity
0
F0 Fa Fb Fc Fd Fe
H2
H1
+1
SPECTRAL
POWER
DENSITY
(Relevant to
peak power of
the signal)
RF signal attenuation limit values (7 GHz to 38 GHz - ND)
Traffic
capacity
Channel
spacing (MHz)
Fa
(MHz)
Fb
(MHz)
Fc
(MHz)
Fd
(MHz)
Fe
(MHz)
H1
(dB)
H2
(dB)
2xE1 3,5 1.4 2.8 3.5 7 8.75 -23 -45
4xE1 7 2.7 5.6 6.5 13 17.5
8xE1 14 (13.75 for 18
GHz only)
5.4 11.2 13 26 35
16xE1
/1xE3
28 (27.5 for 18
GHz only)
11 19 25 45 70
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-34
Fig. 13.3 ETSI Block diagram of Rx RF side
DEM
E Z
RECEIVER
A
RF Rx
FILTER
B
BRANCHING
NETWORK
C
FEEDER
D
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-35
MOD
E Z
TRANSMIT.
A
RF Tx
FILTER
B
BRANCHING
NETWORK
C
FEEDER
D
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-36
Fig. 13.5 Mask of the RF signal for 7 to 38 GHz ODU (HP mode) according to the traffic
capacity
0
F0 Fa Fb Fc Fd Fe
H2
H1
+1
RF signal attenuation limit values (7 GHz to 38 GHz - HP)
Traffic
capacity
Channel
spacing (MHz)
Fa
(MHz)
Fb
(MHz)
Fc
(MHz)
Fd
(MHz)
Fe
(MHz)
H1
(dB)
H2
(dB)
2xE1 3.5 1.4 2.8 3.5 7 8.75 -23 -45
4xE1 7 2.7 5.6 6.5 13 17.5
8xE1 14 (13.75 for 18
GHz only)
5.4 11.2 13 26 35
16xE1
/1xE3
28 (27.5 for 18
GHz only)
11 19 25 45 70
SPECTRAL
POWER
DENSITY
(Relevant to
peak power of
the signal)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-37
Fig. 13.6 Mask of the RF signal for 23, 26, 28 and 38 GHz ODU (HD mode) according to
the traffic capacity
0
F0 Fa Fb Fc Fd Fe
H3
H1
+1
H2
RF signal attenuation limit values (23, 26, 28 and 38 GHz - HD)
Traffic
capacity
Channel
spacing
(MHz)
Fa
(MHz)
Fb
(MHz)
Fc
(MHz)
Fd
(MHz)
Fe
(MHz)
H1
(dB)
H2
(dB)
H3
(dB)
2xE1 1.75 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a.
-30 -35 -50
4xE1 3.5 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a.
8xE1 7 2.8 5.6 7 12.25 17.5
16xE1
/1xE3
14 5.6 11.2 14 24.5 35
SPECTRAL
POWER
DENSITY
(Relevant to
peak power of
the signal)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-38
Fig. 13.7 Mask of the RF signal for 7, 8,15 and 18 GHz ODU (HD mode) according to the
traffic capacity
0
F0 Fa Fb Fc Fd Fe
H3
H1
+1
H2
RF signal attenuation limit values (7, 8, 15 and 18 GHz - HD)
Traffic
capacity
Channel
spacing
(MHz)
Fa
(MHz)
Fb
(MHz)
Fc
(MHz)
Fd
(MHz)
Fe
(MHz)
H1
(dB)
H2
(dB)
H3
(dB)
2xE1 1.75 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a.
-32 -37 -55
4xE1 3.5 n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a.
8xE1 7 2.8 5.6 7 14 17.5
16xE1
/1xE3
14 5.6 11.2 14 28 35
SPECTRAL
POWER
DENSITY
(Relevant to
peak power of
the signal)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-39
Fig. 13.8 ETSI Block diagram of Rx RF side
DEM
E Z
RECEIVER
A
RF Rx
FILTER
B
BRANCHING
NETWORK
C
FEEDER
D
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-40
MOD
E Z
TRANSMIT.
A
RF Tx
FILTER
B
BRANCHING
NETWORK
C
FEEDER
D
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-41
Fig. 13.10Mask of the RF signal for 18, 23 and 38 GHz ODU (ND mode) according to the
traffic capacity
0
F0 Fa Fb Fc Fd Fe
H2
H1
+1
SPECTRAL
POWER
DENSITY
(Relevant to
peak power of
the signal)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-42
Fig. 13.11 Mask of the RF signal for 18 Ghz ODU (HD mode) or 23, 38 GHz ODU (HD mode)
according to the traffic capacity
0
F0 Fa Fb Fc Fd Fe
H3
H1
+1
H2
SPECTRAL
POWER
DENSITY
(Relevant to
peak power of
the signal)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-43
Fig. 13.12ETSI Block diagram of Rx RF side
DEM
E Z
RECEIVER
A
RF Rx
FILTER
B
BRANCHING
NETWORK
C
FEEDER
D
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-44
Fig. 13.13 Shape of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal
NOMINAL
PULSE
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-45
Fig. 13.14Shape of 34 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal
20 %
20 %
10 %
10 %
50 %
V=100%
10 %
10 %
20 %
219 ns
244 ns
194 ns
269 ns
488 ns
0 %
10 %
10 %
NOMINAL
PULSE
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-46
Fig. 13.15 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU
AIR
TEMPERATURE
C
GUARANTEED PERFORMANCES
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-47
Fig. 13.16Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for ODU
AIR
TEMPERATURE
C
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-48
Fig. 13.17 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU-ODU storage
AIR
TEMPERATURE
C
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-49
Fig. 13.18Braided coaxial cable - IDU/ODU tipical connection
Coaxial connector
90 N type
Braided IN/OUT
coaxial cable
Coaxial connector
90 SMA type
IDU ASSEMBLY
Note = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 200 mt.
(50 m for 32xE1 IDU)
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-50
Fig. 13.19 1/4 coaxial cable - IDU/ODU tipical connection
IDU ASSEMBLY
Note = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 300 mt.
(80 m for 32xE1 IDU)
1/4 IN/OUT
coaxial cable
IDU ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-51
Fig. 13.201/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side
The figure shows a system in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) or ADD DROP configuration.
In case of 1+0 configuration only one IN/OUT connection is present.
TO GROUNDING BAR
N3 ETSI/19 RACK
TO ODU
SECTION
1/4 coaxial cable
Coaxial N-plug
Ground cable
OSM/N coaxial tail
(L.=1 Mt.)
TO IDU ASSEMBLY
Cage nut M6
Bush 6x35
Screw 6x16
M4 nut + 4x8 screw
Coaxial cable
Fixing bracket
IDU ASSEMBLY
IMC 0031METD
Issue 1, June 2006
2006 Siemens AG
13-52

SRAL XD 3.7 Training Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SRAL XD 3.7 Training Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Training Manual

SRAL XD (plug-in IDU) SVR 3.7

Вам также может понравиться